material and equipment standard for low voltage switchgear
Post on 05-Oct-2021
1 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither whole nor
any part of this document may be disclosed to any third party, reproduced,
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
Material and equipment standard for low voltage
switchgear and controlgear
IPS-
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither whole nor
any part of this document may be disclosed to any third party, reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
Material and equipment standard for low voltage
switchgear and controlgear – Technical Specifications
Third edition
April 2019
-M-EL-143(3)
This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner. Neither whole nor
stored in any retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.
Material and equipment standard for low voltage
Technical Specifications
Foreword
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the views of the Irania
and are intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable st
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
the local market availability. The options which are not specified in the text of the standards
are itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select his appropriate preferences therein
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be sufficiently flexible so that the users
these standards to their requirements. However, they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user. This addendu
IPS shall form the job specification for the specific project or work.
The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject
to amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the latest edition
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant techn
approval will be incorporated in the next revision of the standard.
Deputy of Standardization, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects
Affairs, No.17, St. 14th, North Kheradmand, Karimkhan
Postal Code- 1585886851
Tel: 021-88810459-60 & 021-
Fax: 021-88810462
Email: Standards@nioc.ir
April 2019
IPS
II
The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
and are intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing installations and other such facilities.
IPS is based on internationally acceptable standards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
bility. The options which are not specified in the text of the standards
are itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select his appropriate preferences therein
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be sufficiently flexible so that the users
these standards to their requirements. However, they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which
elaborates the particular requirements of the user. This addendum together with the relevant
IPS shall form the job specification for the specific project or work.
dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject
to amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the latest edition of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the following address. These comments and
recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant technical committee and in case of
approval will be incorporated in the next revision of the standard.
Deputy of Standardization, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects
Affairs, No.17, St. 14th, North Kheradmand, Karimkhan Blvd., Tehran, Iran.
-66153055
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
n Ministry of Petroleum
and are intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical and
petrochemical plants, gas handling and processing installations and other such facilities.
andards and includes selections from the items
stipulated in the referenced standards. They are also supplemented by additional requirements
and/or modifications based on the experience acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and
bility. The options which are not specified in the text of the standards
are itemized in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select his appropriate preferences therein
The IPS standards are therefore expected to be sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt
these standards to their requirements. However, they may not cover every requirement of each
project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which
m together with the relevant
dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject
of IPS shall be applicable
The users of IPS are therefore requested to send their views and comments, including any
addendum prepared for particular cases to the following address. These comments and
ical committee and in case of
Deputy of Standardization, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects
Blvd., Tehran, Iran.
Titles
Introduction
1 Scope
2 Normative references
3 Terms and definitions
4 Service conditions
5 Units
6 Application
7 General requirments
7.1 Enclosure
7.2 Busbars
7.3 Wiring, terminals and markings
7.4 Safety considerations and interlocks
8 Major components
8.1 Incoming air circuit breakers
8.2 Motor controllers
8.3 Other outgoing feeders (rather than motor type)
9 Auxiliary components
9.1 Local motor control stations
9.2 Instruments
9.3 Protective relays
9.4 Current transformers
9.5 Voltage transformers
9.6 Anti-Condensation heaters
9.7 Accessories
10 Tests and inspection
11 Spare parts
12 Documentation
13 Shipment
14 Guarantee
Annexes:
Annex A (Normative) Low voltage switchgear and controlgear data sheet
Annex B (Normative) Additional requirements for outdoor low voltage switchgear
April 2019
IPS
III
Contents
7.3 Wiring, terminals and markings
7.4 Safety considerations and interlocks
8.1 Incoming air circuit breakers
8.3 Other outgoing feeders (rather than motor type)
9.1 Local motor control stations
Condensation heaters
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear data sheet
Additional requirements for outdoor low voltage switchgear
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Page No
IV
1
1
3
4
5
5
6
6
8
9
10
10
10
13
15
15
15
16
16
17
18
18
18
19
20
20
21
21
22
Additional requirements for outdoor low voltage switchgear 24
Introduction
This standard has been developed in “specialized reference committees”
consensus of a wide range of professionals, representatives of organizations, companies,
management, institutions and research
Petroleum Standards developed by the Ministry of Petroleum ar
specialized reference committees every five years and, are performed with regard to their
applicability and effectiveness, approve, revoke or revise them in accordance with current
Ministry of Petroleum regulations. Obviously, in accordance with clause 4 of the Procedure,
the periodical review can be done early, if necessary.
(Persian) and English languages, English language shall govern.
Note 1 - The standard specification for switchgear
2004 , and replaced by the following two standard specification
revision(1).
IPS-M-EL-143(1) Low voltage switchgear and control gear
IPS-M-EL-144(1) Medium and high voltage switchgear and control gear
By the way, standard specification low voltage motor starters IPS
specification low voltage motor control center IPS
Note 2 - This bilingual standard is a r
specification by the relevant technical committee on 2019, which is issued as revision (3).
Revision (2) of the mentioned
Iranian Petroleum Standard
Deputy of Standardization,
Projects Affairs, No.17, St. 14th, North kheradmand, Karimkhan Blvd.,
P.O.Box: 1585886851
Tel: + 98 (21) 61623055, (21) 88810459
Fax: + 98 (21) 88810462
Email: standards@nioc.ir
Website: http://ips.mop.ir
1 - Standardized specialized reference committees are qualified committees responsible for
reviewing standards for the petroleum industry (governmental, private and cooperative sectors).
April 2019
IPS
IV
This standard has been developed in “specialized reference committees”
consensus of a wide range of professionals, representatives of organizations, companies,
management, institutions and research-laboratory centers, manufacturers, associations, etc.
Petroleum Standards developed by the Ministry of Petroleum are reviewed systematically by
specialized reference committees every five years and, are performed with regard to their
applicability and effectiveness, approve, revoke or revise them in accordance with current
regulations. Obviously, in accordance with clause 4 of the Procedure,
the periodical review can be done early, if necessary. In case of conflict between Farsi
and English languages, English language shall govern.
The standard specification for switchgear, IPS-M-EL-140(0) is withdrawn in June
2004 , and replaced by the following two standard specifications which are issued as
143(1) Low voltage switchgear and control gear
um and high voltage switchgear and control gear
By the way, standard specification low voltage motor starters IPS-M-EL-142(0) and standard
specification low voltage motor control center IPS-M-EL-165(0) are withdrawn
This bilingual standard is a revised version of the IPS-M-EL
specification by the relevant technical committee on 2019, which is issued as revision (3).
mentioned standard specification is withdrawn.
Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS)
Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of
No.17, St. 14th, North kheradmand, Karimkhan Blvd., Tehran
61623055, (21) 88810459 - 60
Standardized specialized reference committees are qualified committees responsible for
reviewing standards for the petroleum industry (governmental, private and cooperative sectors).
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
This standard has been developed in “specialized reference committees”1 and with the
consensus of a wide range of professionals, representatives of organizations, companies,
laboratory centers, manufacturers, associations, etc.
e reviewed systematically by
specialized reference committees every five years and, are performed with regard to their
applicability and effectiveness, approve, revoke or revise them in accordance with current
regulations. Obviously, in accordance with clause 4 of the Procedure,
In case of conflict between Farsi
140(0) is withdrawn in June
s which are issued as
142(0) and standard
165(0) are withdrawn.
EL-143(2) standard
specification by the relevant technical committee on 2019, which is issued as revision (3).
Technical, Execution and Evaluation of
Tehran, Iran.
Standardized specialized reference committees are qualified committees responsible for determination and
reviewing standards for the petroleum industry (governmental, private and cooperative sectors).
Material and equipment standard for low voltage switchgear and
controlgear
Warning - Safety requirements are mandatory in all
hygiene items are listed in this standard. In the event of such occurrence, the user is responsible
for maintaining the proper health and safety conditions and enforcing it.
1 Scope
1.1 This standard specification
tests, inspection and quality control of low voltage AC switchgear and controlgear assemblies
herein after referred to this specification as “low voltage switchgear” or “switchgear”.
1.2 The low voltage switchgear will be installed in oil, gas and petrochemical industries in
Iran under the environmental and service conditions specified herein.
1.3 The general requirements are given in this specification; the specific requirements of
individual cases will be given in request for quotation and / or purchase order.
1.4 This standard specification will be supplemented by a single line diagram and other
attachments when necessary.
Note - In case of conflict between Farsi
govern.
2 Normative references
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their
content constitutes requirements of this document.
For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition
of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
Usage of these references for utilizing this standar
2-1 ANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2)
numbers, acronyms, and contact designations
2-2 API RP 505 , Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
installations at petroleum
2-3 IEC 60038, IEC Standard Voltages
2-4 IEC 60051-1, Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories - Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to al
2-5 IEC 60073, Basic and safety principles for man
identification - Coding principles for indicators and actuators
2-6 IEC 60079-1, Explosive atmospheres
enclosures ‘d’
2-7 IEC 60079-10-1, Explosive atmospheres
April 2019
IPS
1
Material and equipment standard for low voltage switchgear and
controlgear - Technical specifications
Safety requirements are mandatory in all parts of this standard. Not all safety and
hygiene items are listed in this standard. In the event of such occurrence, the user is responsible
for maintaining the proper health and safety conditions and enforcing it.
This standard specification covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture,
tests, inspection and quality control of low voltage AC switchgear and controlgear assemblies
herein after referred to this specification as “low voltage switchgear” or “switchgear”.
tage switchgear will be installed in oil, gas and petrochemical industries in
Iran under the environmental and service conditions specified herein.
The general requirements are given in this specification; the specific requirements of
individual cases will be given in request for quotation and / or purchase order.
This standard specification will be supplemented by a single line diagram and other
In case of conflict between Farsi (persian) and English languages, English language shall
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their
constitutes requirements of this document.
For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition
of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
Usage of these references for utilizing this standard are mandatory.
ANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2) IEEE Standard electrical power system device function
cronyms, and contact designations
Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
installations at petroleum facilities classified as class 1, zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2
IEC Standard Voltages
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to al
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
Coding principles for indicators and actuators
Explosive atmospheres – Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof
Explosive atmospheres - Part 10-1: Classification of areas
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Material and equipment standard for low voltage switchgear and
parts of this standard. Not all safety and
hygiene items are listed in this standard. In the event of such occurrence, the user is responsible
covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture,
tests, inspection and quality control of low voltage AC switchgear and controlgear assemblies
herein after referred to this specification as “low voltage switchgear” or “switchgear”.
tage switchgear will be installed in oil, gas and petrochemical industries in
The general requirements are given in this specification; the specific requirements of
individual cases will be given in request for quotation and / or purchase order.
This standard specification will be supplemented by a single line diagram and other
and English languages, English language shall
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their
For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition
electrical power system device function
Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
facilities classified as class 1, zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to all parts
machine interface, marking and
Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof
1: Classification of areas - Explosive
gas atmospheres
2-8 IEC 60079-10-2, Explosive atmospheres
Explosive dust atmospheres
2-9 IEC 60269-1+AMD1+AMD2
2-10 IEC 60269-2+AMD1, Low
fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
of standardized systems of fuses A to K
2-11 IEC 60269-3+AMD1+AMD2
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar
applications) - Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to F
2-12 IEC 60269-4+AMD1+AMD2
forfuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices
2-13 IEC 60445+COR1, Basic and safety principles for man
identification - Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and
conductors
2-14 IEC 60529+AMD2+COR1
2-15 IEC 60688+COR1, Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals
2-16 IEC 60947 (All parts), Low
2-17 IEC 61869-1, Instrument transformers
2-18 IEC 61869-2, Instrument transformers
transformers
2-19 IEC 61869-3, Instrument transformers
voltage transformers
2-20 IEC 61869-5, Instrument transformers
voltage transformers
2-21 IEC 61439-1, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
rules
2-22 IEC 61439-6, Low-voltage s
trunking systems (busways)
2-23 IEC 62052-11+AMD1,
tests and test conditions
2-24 IEC 62053-11+AMD1, Electricity
Part 11: Electromechanical meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1and 2)
2-25 IEC 62262, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
April 2019
IPS
2
Explosive atmospheres – Part 10-2: Classification of areas
Explosive dust atmospheres
1+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for
fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
of standardized systems of fuses A to K
3+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 3: Supplementary requirements
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar
Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to F
4+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 4: Supplement
links for the protection of semiconductor devices
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and
IEC 60529+AMD2+COR1, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements
Instrument transformers - Part 2: Additional requirements for current
Instrument transformers - Part 3: Additional requirements for
Instrument transformers - Part 5: Additional requirements for capacitor
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
trunking systems (busways)
, Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) - General requirements,
tests and test conditions - Part 11: Metering equipment
Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) - Particular requirements
Part 11: Electromechanical meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1and 2)
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
2: Classification of areas –
General requirements
Part 2: Supplementary requirements for
fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) - Examples
Part 3: Supplementary requirements
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar
Part 4: Supplementary requirements
machine interface, marking and
Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and
closures (IP Code)
Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
Part 2: Additional requirements for current
Part 3: Additional requirements for inductive
Part 5: Additional requirements for capacitor
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: General
witchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 6: Busbar
General requirements,
Particular requirements -
Part 11: Electromechanical meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1and 2)
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
against external mechanical impacts (IK code
2-26 IPS-E-EL-100, Engineering and equipment standard for electrical system
design(industrial and non
2-27 IPS-E-GN-100, Engineering standard for units
2-28 IPS-M-EL-161, Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
Note 1- Where standards other than IEC are specified (such as ANSI C37.2), it is understood that the
equivalent IEC standard is acceptable.
Note 2- Any deviation from this specification and the above mentioned references shall be clearly
mentioned in the vendor’s proposal.
3 Terms and definitions
This standard uses the terms and definitions set forth in IEC 60050
standards.
3.1
company
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
such as National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National
Petrochemical Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And Distribution Company.
3.2
purchaser
Means the "Company" where this standard is a part of direct purchaser order by the
"Company", and the “Contractor” where this Standard is a part of contract document
3.3
vendor and supplier
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or fabricate the equipment or material.
3.4
contractor
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose tender
3.5
inspector
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing
by the company for the inspection of fabrication and installation work
April 2019
IPS
3
against external mechanical impacts (IK code)
Engineering and equipment standard for electrical system
design(industrial and non-industrial
Engineering standard for units
161, Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
Where standards other than IEC are specified (such as ANSI C37.2), it is understood that the
equivalent IEC standard is acceptable.
Any deviation from this specification and the above mentioned references shall be clearly
proposal.
This standard uses the terms and definitions set forth in IEC 60050-151 and IEC 60050
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National
Petrochemical Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And Distribution Company.
where this standard is a part of direct purchaser order by the
, and the “Contractor” where this Standard is a part of contract document
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or fabricate the equipment or material.
Refers to the persons, firm or company whose tender has been accepted by the company.
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing
by the company for the inspection of fabrication and installation work.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Engineering and equipment standard for electrical system
161, Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
Where standards other than IEC are specified (such as ANSI C37.2), it is understood that the
Any deviation from this specification and the above mentioned references shall be clearly
151 and IEC 60050-441
Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum
National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National
Petrochemical Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And Distribution Company.
where this standard is a part of direct purchaser order by the
, and the “Contractor” where this Standard is a part of contract document
Refers to firm or person who will supply and/or fabricate the equipment or material.
has been accepted by the company.
The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing
3.6
shall
Is used where a provision is m
3.7
should
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
3.8
will
Is normally used in connection with the action by the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
supplier or vendor.
3.9
may
Is used where a provision is completely discretionary.
4 Service conditions
4.1 The low voltage switchgear specified herein will generally be installed indoor in
substation rooms, which will be ventilated and/or air conditioned.
4.2 As far as the area classification is concerned the substation rooms and other in
locations where the low voltage switchgear will be installed are considered safe area. This
standard specification specifies the equipment suitable for safe area indoor installation.
4.3 In case where the low voltage switchgear will be installed outdoor, which will be
indicated in data sheet Annex
additional requirements and/or modifications stipulated
for outdoor low voltage switchgear and control gear".
4.4 Unless otherwise stated in data sheet, The ambient air temperature does not exceed +40
°C and its average over a period of 24 h
The lower limit of the ambient air temp
Ambient air temperature is that existing in the vicinity of the equipment if supplied without
enclosure, or in the vicinity of the enclosure if supplied with an enclosure.
4.5 Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet, the altitude of the
exceed 2000 meter.
Note- For equipment to be used at higher altitudes, it is necessary to take into account the reduction of
the dielectric strength and the cooling effect of the air. Electrical equipment intended to operate u
these conditions shall be designed or used in accordance with an agreement between manufacturer and
user.
4.6 The relative humidity of the air does not exceed 50 % at a maximum temperature of +40
°C.
April 2019
IPS
4
Is used where a provision is mandatory.
Is used where a provision is advisory only.
Is normally used in connection with the action by the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
Is used where a provision is completely discretionary.
The low voltage switchgear specified herein will generally be installed indoor in
substation rooms, which will be ventilated and/or air conditioned.
As far as the area classification is concerned the substation rooms and other in
locations where the low voltage switchgear will be installed are considered safe area. This
standard specification specifies the equipment suitable for safe area indoor installation.
In case where the low voltage switchgear will be installed outdoor, which will be
Annex A. This standard specification shall be supplemented with
additional requirements and/or modifications stipulated in Annex B "Additional requir
for outdoor low voltage switchgear and control gear".
Unless otherwise stated in data sheet, The ambient air temperature does not exceed +40
°C and its average over a period of 24 h does not exceed +35 °C.
The lower limit of the ambient air temperature is –5 °C.
Ambient air temperature is that existing in the vicinity of the equipment if supplied without
enclosure, or in the vicinity of the enclosure if supplied with an enclosure.
Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet, the altitude of the site of installation does not
For equipment to be used at higher altitudes, it is necessary to take into account the reduction of
dielectric strength and the cooling effect of the air. Electrical equipment intended to operate u
shall be designed or used in accordance with an agreement between manufacturer and
The relative humidity of the air does not exceed 50 % at a maximum temperature of +40
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Is normally used in connection with the action by the “Company” rather than by a contractor,
The low voltage switchgear specified herein will generally be installed indoor in
As far as the area classification is concerned the substation rooms and other indoor
locations where the low voltage switchgear will be installed are considered safe area. This
standard specification specifies the equipment suitable for safe area indoor installation.
In case where the low voltage switchgear will be installed outdoor, which will be
A. This standard specification shall be supplemented with
"Additional requirements
Unless otherwise stated in data sheet, The ambient air temperature does not exceed +40
Ambient air temperature is that existing in the vicinity of the equipment if supplied without
site of installation does not
For equipment to be used at higher altitudes, it is necessary to take into account the reduction of
dielectric strength and the cooling effect of the air. Electrical equipment intended to operate under
shall be designed or used in accordance with an agreement between manufacturer and
The relative humidity of the air does not exceed 50 % at a maximum temperature of +40
4.7 The atmosphere in which the equipment is to be
greater than the values specified herein or contain an abnormal amount of dust, acids,
corrosive gases, etc.
If the conditions for operation in service and the application differ from those given in this
standard, the user shall state the deviations from the standard conditions and consult the
manufacturer on the suitability of the equipment for use under such conditions.
4.8 A special agreement shall be made between user and manufacturer if the conditions
during transport and storage, e.g. temperature and humidity, differ from those defined in
to 4.7, except that, unless otherwise specified, The following temperature range
transport and storage: between
up to +70 °C.
4.9 Unless otherwise specified in the datasheet, the assembly and the components installed
therein shall be suitable for use in a poll
1. However, the air will be laden with dust, salt and/or sulphur as encountered in the
petroleum industries.
The equipment subjected to these extreme conditions without being operated shall not be
damaged and shall operate normally under the specified conditions.
4.10 The equipment shall be suitable for operation, without deleterious effect, with variations
of voltage and frequency tolerances as follows:
- AC Voltage supply: ± 10%
- Frequency: ± 5%
- DC Voltage supply: +10 /
4.11 Impact strength shall be at minimum IK 08 as defined in the IEC 62262.
5 Units
This standard is based on International System of Units (SI), as per
where otherwise specified. If it is necessary to express values in another unit, at first, it must
be stated to the SI equivalent and then inserted in fro
6 Application
6.1 The voltage levels adapted in the oil, gas and petrochemical industries of Iran are based on
the IEC 60038.
6.2 The low voltage system is generally 230/400 volt with solidly earthed neutral.
6.3 The low voltage switchgear will be fed from low voltage generator/s or transformer/s with
a voltage of 230/400 volt.
6.4 The low voltage switchgear is equipment, which includes switching devices with associated control, measuring, protective and regulating dthe control of electrical energy consuming equipment, with voltage rating of 400 volt three phase and 230 volt single phase.6.5 The low voltage switchgear includes motor starters and/or motor control center/s (MCC),
incomer circuit breaker/s, bus tie circuit breaker/s, outgoing feeder breakers and/or switch
fuses and auxiliary components as specified in this specification and/or indicated in the single
line diagram/s.
April 2019
IPS
5
The atmosphere in which the equipment is to be installed may have a relative humidity
greater than the values specified herein or contain an abnormal amount of dust, acids,
If the conditions for operation in service and the application differ from those given in this
user shall state the deviations from the standard conditions and consult the
manufacturer on the suitability of the equipment for use under such conditions.
A special agreement shall be made between user and manufacturer if the conditions
during transport and storage, e.g. temperature and humidity, differ from those defined in
.7, except that, unless otherwise specified, The following temperature range
between –25 °C and +55 °C and, for short periods not exceeding 24 h,
Unless otherwise specified in the datasheet, the assembly and the components installed
therein shall be suitable for use in a pollution degree 3 environment according to IEC 60947
1. However, the air will be laden with dust, salt and/or sulphur as encountered in the
The equipment subjected to these extreme conditions without being operated shall not be
nd shall operate normally under the specified conditions.
The equipment shall be suitable for operation, without deleterious effect, with variations
of voltage and frequency tolerances as follows:
AC Voltage supply: ± 10%
Voltage supply: +10 / -15%.
Impact strength shall be at minimum IK 08 as defined in the IEC 62262.
This standard is based on International System of Units (SI), as per IPS
If it is necessary to express values in another unit, at first, it must
be stated to the SI equivalent and then inserted in front of the desired unit in parentheses.
pted in the oil, gas and petrochemical industries of Iran are based on
The low voltage system is generally 230/400 volt with solidly earthed neutral.
low voltage switchgear will be fed from low voltage generator/s or transformer/s with
The low voltage switchgear is equipment, which includes switching devices with associated control, measuring, protective and regulating devices and intended in principle for the control of electrical energy consuming equipment, with voltage rating of 400 volt three phase and 230 volt single phase.
The low voltage switchgear includes motor starters and/or motor control center/s (MCC),
comer circuit breaker/s, bus tie circuit breaker/s, outgoing feeder breakers and/or switch
fuses and auxiliary components as specified in this specification and/or indicated in the single
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
installed may have a relative humidity
greater than the values specified herein or contain an abnormal amount of dust, acids,
If the conditions for operation in service and the application differ from those given in this
user shall state the deviations from the standard conditions and consult the
manufacturer on the suitability of the equipment for use under such conditions.
A special agreement shall be made between user and manufacturer if the conditions
during transport and storage, e.g. temperature and humidity, differ from those defined in 4.1
.7, except that, unless otherwise specified, The following temperature range applies during
25 °C and +55 °C and, for short periods not exceeding 24 h,
Unless otherwise specified in the datasheet, the assembly and the components installed
ution degree 3 environment according to IEC 60947-
1. However, the air will be laden with dust, salt and/or sulphur as encountered in the
The equipment subjected to these extreme conditions without being operated shall not be
The equipment shall be suitable for operation, without deleterious effect, with variations
Impact strength shall be at minimum IK 08 as defined in the IEC 62262.
IPS-E-GN-100 except
If it is necessary to express values in another unit, at first, it must
nt of the desired unit in parentheses.
pted in the oil, gas and petrochemical industries of Iran are based on
The low voltage system is generally 230/400 volt with solidly earthed neutral.
low voltage switchgear will be fed from low voltage generator/s or transformer/s with
The low voltage switchgear is equipment, which includes switching devices with evices and intended in principle for
the control of electrical energy consuming equipment, with voltage rating of 400 volt three
The low voltage switchgear includes motor starters and/or motor control center/s (MCC),
comer circuit breaker/s, bus tie circuit breaker/s, outgoing feeder breakers and/or switch
fuses and auxiliary components as specified in this specification and/or indicated in the single
6.6 The incomer circuit breakers, if more than one, shall be closed at normal operation. The
tie breaker/s can be closed at normal operation, or can be open which shall close
automatically when one of the incomer breakers opens. The mode of operation of the t
breaker/s will be decided by company representative and shall be indicated in the single line
diagram/s and/or data sheet.
breakers with upstream breakers shall be included accordingly.
6.7 Single line diagram/s is
components of the low voltage switchgear. Control circuit schematic diagrams, wiring
diagrams, schedule sheets and interconnection diagrams will be attached when necessary.
7 General requirments
7.1 Enclosure
7.1.1 The switchgear assemblies shall be multi cubicle type as specified and shown in IEC
61439-1 and shall be suitable for indoor installation.
7.1.2 The enclosure shall be metal enclosed compartmented type, self support
standing, floor mounted and shall be constructed with steel structure/s and minimum
thickness of 2 mm. Thickness of other parts of enclosure shall be in accordance with type test
certificate. Components shall be accessible from the front of the
7.1.3 All equipment shall be installed inside the enclosure, suitably subdivided into separate
compartments. The internal separation by partitions or barriers (metallic or non
conform to Form 3b/4b or Form 4a (as stated by owner
7.1.4 According to IEC 61439
– From 3b: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
from one another.
Separation of terminals for external conductors
units, but not from the terminals of other functional units.
– From 4a: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
from one another.
Separation of terminals for external
terminals of any other functional unit and the busbars. Seperation of the external conductors
from the busbars. Separation of the external conductors associated with a functional unit from
other functional units and their terminals. External conductors need not be separated from
each other.
Terminals in same compartment as associated functional unit.
7.1.5 Unless otherwise specified in data sheet, the indoor enclosure shall at least provide a
degree of protection of IP 41 according to IEC 60529 without using the floor of the switch
room as part of the enclosure. The partitions or barriers between functional units shall at least
provide a degree of protection of IP 2X. (The IP rating for outdoor enclosure
Annex B).
7.1.6 The height and the depth of the enclosure shall be as per manufacturer standard and
shall be indicated in data sheet and maximum height of enclosure shall be 220cm.
buttons and operating handles and indicating
more than 180cm.
April 2019
IPS
6
The incomer circuit breakers, if more than one, shall be closed at normal operation. The
tie breaker/s can be closed at normal operation, or can be open which shall close
automatically when one of the incomer breakers opens. The mode of operation of the t
breaker/s will be decided by company representative and shall be indicated in the single line
The protection scheme and intertripping of incomers and tie
breakers with upstream breakers shall be included accordingly.
ingle line diagram/s is/are mentioned in this specification show/s only the major
components of the low voltage switchgear. Control circuit schematic diagrams, wiring
diagrams, schedule sheets and interconnection diagrams will be attached when necessary.
The switchgear assemblies shall be multi cubicle type as specified and shown in IEC
1 and shall be suitable for indoor installation.
he enclosure shall be metal enclosed compartmented type, self support
standing, floor mounted and shall be constructed with steel structure/s and minimum
thickness of 2 mm. Thickness of other parts of enclosure shall be in accordance with type test
certificate. Components shall be accessible from the front of the switchgear.
All equipment shall be installed inside the enclosure, suitably subdivided into separate
compartments. The internal separation by partitions or barriers (metallic or non
conform to Form 3b/4b or Form 4a (as stated by owner) as defined in IEC 61439
According to IEC 61439-2, Form 3b and 4a are as follows:
From 3b: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
Separation of terminals for external conductors and external conductors from the functional
units, but not from the terminals of other functional units.
From 4a: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
Separation of terminals for external conductors associated with a functional unit from the
terminals of any other functional unit and the busbars. Seperation of the external conductors
from the busbars. Separation of the external conductors associated with a functional unit from
nal units and their terminals. External conductors need not be separated from
Terminals in same compartment as associated functional unit.
Unless otherwise specified in data sheet, the indoor enclosure shall at least provide a
1 according to IEC 60529 without using the floor of the switch
room as part of the enclosure. The partitions or barriers between functional units shall at least
provide a degree of protection of IP 2X. (The IP rating for outdoor enclosure
The height and the depth of the enclosure shall be as per manufacturer standard and
shall be indicated in data sheet and maximum height of enclosure shall be 220cm.
buttons and operating handles and indicating instruments shall be installed at a height of not
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
The incomer circuit breakers, if more than one, shall be closed at normal operation. The
tie breaker/s can be closed at normal operation, or can be open which shall close
automatically when one of the incomer breakers opens. The mode of operation of the tie
breaker/s will be decided by company representative and shall be indicated in the single line
The protection scheme and intertripping of incomers and tie
are mentioned in this specification show/s only the major
components of the low voltage switchgear. Control circuit schematic diagrams, wiring
diagrams, schedule sheets and interconnection diagrams will be attached when necessary.
The switchgear assemblies shall be multi cubicle type as specified and shown in IEC
he enclosure shall be metal enclosed compartmented type, self supporting, free
standing, floor mounted and shall be constructed with steel structure/s and minimum
thickness of 2 mm. Thickness of other parts of enclosure shall be in accordance with type test
switchgear.
All equipment shall be installed inside the enclosure, suitably subdivided into separate
compartments. The internal separation by partitions or barriers (metallic or non-metallic) shall
) as defined in IEC 61439-2.
From 3b: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
and external conductors from the functional
From 4a: Separation of busbars from all functional units. Separation of all functional units
conductors associated with a functional unit from the
terminals of any other functional unit and the busbars. Seperation of the external conductors
from the busbars. Separation of the external conductors associated with a functional unit from
nal units and their terminals. External conductors need not be separated from
Unless otherwise specified in data sheet, the indoor enclosure shall at least provide a
1 according to IEC 60529 without using the floor of the switch
room as part of the enclosure. The partitions or barriers between functional units shall at least
provide a degree of protection of IP 2X. (The IP rating for outdoor enclosure is indicated in
The height and the depth of the enclosure shall be as per manufacturer standard and
shall be indicated in data sheet and maximum height of enclosure shall be 220cm. Switches,
instruments shall be installed at a height of not
7.1.7 The enclosure together with bus bars and wirings shall be extendable at both ends
without the need to cut or drill any part of the enclosure.
7.1.8 Empty enclosures (space) at least
within the enclosure for future use. Such compartments shall be arranged so that they can be
equipped with minimum de-energisation of the relevant section of the switchgear.
The empty cubicle shall include connection to busbar and corresponding support, fixed parts
of the equipment.
The number of empty enclosures (space) shall be 10% of each size of outgoing units of which
at least three units are installed.
shall be provided on the basis of 20%, as indicated in single line diagram/s, with minimum of
one unit for each different starter/feeder size (except incomer and bus
7.1.9 The switchgear enclosure shall be natural cooling. The design of the vertical structures
and the placement of starters and feeders shall be such as to avoid heat build
the cubicles.
7.1.10 The enclosure, for outdoor and indoor installation, intended for u
high humidity and temperatures varying within wide limits, shall be provided with suitable
arrangements (ventilation and/or internal heating, drain holes, etc.) to prevent harmful
condensation within the enclosure. However, the specifi
same time be maintained. Where such heaters are specified in data sheet
conform to article 9.6 of this specification.
7.1.11 The enclosure shall be properly degreased, phophasized, cleaned and painte
inside and outside. The painting shall be done by means of electrostatic powder coating based
on epoxy and polyester resins. The thickness of paint coating shall be 60 to 80 microns and
shall be cured in accordance with powder manufacturer specifica
enclosure will be decided by company representative. Manufacturer’s standard painting
system, if different from above shall be agreed by company representative.
7.1.12 All incoming and outgoing cables will enter the switchgear from t
outs. If bus ducts are specified for incomers, they enter the switchgear from above. In case
incomers are specified to be via bus ducts, the switchgear supplier shall provide flanged entry
to the switchgear with insulated copper bars e
7.1.13 Provisions shall be included inside the enclosure to support the cables. Cable supports
shall be foreseen at least 40 cm above the bottom of the switchgear. Suitable size cable entries
shall be foreseen in the bottom pl
entries will be sealed after complete installation of cables. Cable glands will be used for
incoming and outgoing cables (cable glands will be supplied by others). Where single core
cables are to be used the bottom plate shall be non
7.1.14 Cables armor and lead cover will be removed inside the enclosure, and will be earthed
by a suitable size flexible earthing wire soldered and clamped to the cable armor and
connected to the switchgear ear
7.1.15 Lifting lugs shall be provided on enclosure/s for ease of handling.
7.1.16 Specification of foundation bolts and installation instructions shall be provided by the
vendor.
April 2019
IPS
7
The enclosure together with bus bars and wirings shall be extendable at both ends
without the need to cut or drill any part of the enclosure.
Empty enclosures (space) at least one on each section of the switchgear shall be foreseen
within the enclosure for future use. Such compartments shall be arranged so that they can be
energisation of the relevant section of the switchgear.
clude connection to busbar and corresponding support, fixed parts
The number of empty enclosures (space) shall be 10% of each size of outgoing units of which
at least three units are installed. This is in excess of spare units. Fully equipped spare units
shall be provided on the basis of 20%, as indicated in single line diagram/s, with minimum of
one unit for each different starter/feeder size (except incomer and bus-tie).
nclosure shall be natural cooling. The design of the vertical structures
and the placement of starters and feeders shall be such as to avoid heat build
The enclosure, for outdoor and indoor installation, intended for use in locations with
high humidity and temperatures varying within wide limits, shall be provided with suitable
arrangements (ventilation and/or internal heating, drain holes, etc.) to prevent harmful
condensation within the enclosure. However, the specified degree of protection shall at the
same time be maintained. Where such heaters are specified in data sheet Annex
.6 of this specification.
The enclosure shall be properly degreased, phophasized, cleaned and painte
inside and outside. The painting shall be done by means of electrostatic powder coating based
on epoxy and polyester resins. The thickness of paint coating shall be 60 to 80 microns and
shall be cured in accordance with powder manufacturer specification. The color of the
enclosure will be decided by company representative. Manufacturer’s standard painting
system, if different from above shall be agreed by company representative.
All incoming and outgoing cables will enter the switchgear from trenches or floor cut
outs. If bus ducts are specified for incomers, they enter the switchgear from above. In case
incomers are specified to be via bus ducts, the switchgear supplier shall provide flanged entry
to the switchgear with insulated copper bars extending to the flange point.
Provisions shall be included inside the enclosure to support the cables. Cable supports
cm above the bottom of the switchgear. Suitable size cable entries
shall be foreseen in the bottom plate of the enclosure for the cables to pass through. Such
entries will be sealed after complete installation of cables. Cable glands will be used for
incoming and outgoing cables (cable glands will be supplied by others). Where single core
used the bottom plate shall be non-magnetic.
Cables armor and lead cover will be removed inside the enclosure, and will be earthed
by a suitable size flexible earthing wire soldered and clamped to the cable armor and
connected to the switchgear earthing busbar.
Lifting lugs shall be provided on enclosure/s for ease of handling.
Specification of foundation bolts and installation instructions shall be provided by the
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
The enclosure together with bus bars and wirings shall be extendable at both ends
one on each section of the switchgear shall be foreseen
within the enclosure for future use. Such compartments shall be arranged so that they can be
energisation of the relevant section of the switchgear.
clude connection to busbar and corresponding support, fixed parts
The number of empty enclosures (space) shall be 10% of each size of outgoing units of which
This is in excess of spare units. Fully equipped spare units
shall be provided on the basis of 20%, as indicated in single line diagram/s, with minimum of
nclosure shall be natural cooling. The design of the vertical structures
and the placement of starters and feeders shall be such as to avoid heat build-up in the top of
se in locations with
high humidity and temperatures varying within wide limits, shall be provided with suitable
arrangements (ventilation and/or internal heating, drain holes, etc.) to prevent harmful
ed degree of protection shall at the
Annex A, they shall
The enclosure shall be properly degreased, phophasized, cleaned and painted from
inside and outside. The painting shall be done by means of electrostatic powder coating based
on epoxy and polyester resins. The thickness of paint coating shall be 60 to 80 microns and
tion. The color of the
enclosure will be decided by company representative. Manufacturer’s standard painting
renches or floor cut-
outs. If bus ducts are specified for incomers, they enter the switchgear from above. In case
incomers are specified to be via bus ducts, the switchgear supplier shall provide flanged entry
Provisions shall be included inside the enclosure to support the cables. Cable supports
cm above the bottom of the switchgear. Suitable size cable entries
ate of the enclosure for the cables to pass through. Such
entries will be sealed after complete installation of cables. Cable glands will be used for
incoming and outgoing cables (cable glands will be supplied by others). Where single core
Cables armor and lead cover will be removed inside the enclosure, and will be earthed
by a suitable size flexible earthing wire soldered and clamped to the cable armor and
Specification of foundation bolts and installation instructions shall be provided by the
7.2 Busbars
7.2.1 Busbars shall be manufactured from hard drawn
comply with IEC 61439-1.
7.2.2 Busbars shall be designed for the full rated current at the maximum ambient temperature
specified without exceeding their temperature rise limits. Design of the busbars
that future extension of the switchgear to either side will be possible.
7.2.3 Power and neutral busbars shall be fully insulated with flame retardant non
insulation material and shall be color coded. Suitable insulation shall b
bolted joints. The insulation of busbar joints and connections shall be removable for
inspection purposes. Busbar joints and connections shall be corrosion protected and secured
to prevent loosening. In cases where requested by the purch
the busbar joints shall be silver plated.
7.2.4 Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the color or the color coding of the busbars
insulation shall be red, yellow and blue for phase busbars and black for neutral busbar,
top to bottom and from left to right when facing the front of the switchgear.
7.2.5 The main horizontal busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout the
length of the switchgear. The cross section and the continuous ampere rating of th
horizontal busbars shall be indicated in data sheet/s.
7.2.6 The vertical busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout their length and
their current rating shall be equal to the sum of the maximum full load ratings of the outgoing
units connected to that busbar considering the future units which could be installed in empty
compartments.
7.2.7 The horizontal and vertical busbars shall be capable of withstanding, without damage,
the magnetic forces and the thermal effects created by th
current for at least one second. The busbars short circuit withstands current shall be indicated
in data sheet and shall not be less than 50
7.2.8 Main horizontal busbars
also be in separate compartment and can be installed behind functional units of each vertical
section. The vertical busbars shall be arranged such that accidental finger contact with live
parts shall be impossible when the breaker/s or starter modules are withdrawn.
7.2.9 Where bus section (tie) breaker/s are specified, they shall be so arranged that one
complete section of busbars and associated connections can be made dead and safe to work
on, while the adjoining section of busbars is still alive.
7.2.10 The neutral busbar shall extend the entire length of the switchgear and shall be
insulated from the earth potential. The neutral bus shall extend into each incomer
compartment. Means of disconne
neutral bus from the neutral source for testing purposes. The current rating of the neutral
busbar shall be at least 50% of the phase busbars.
7.2.11 A separate earth busbar, rated for the maximum
second, shall run the entire length of the switchgear. Sufficient connection points with
adequate terminating facilities shall be provided for terminating the cables screen and/or
armors. The earth busbar shall be equ
to earth copper conductors at each end.
The size of earth copper conductors shall be considered accrding to IPS
April 2019
IPS
8
Busbars shall be manufactured from hard drawn, high conductivity copper and shall
Busbars shall be designed for the full rated current at the maximum ambient temperature
specified without exceeding their temperature rise limits. Design of the busbars
that future extension of the switchgear to either side will be possible.
Power and neutral busbars shall be fully insulated with flame retardant non
insulation material and shall be color coded. Suitable insulation shall b
bolted joints. The insulation of busbar joints and connections shall be removable for
inspection purposes. Busbar joints and connections shall be corrosion protected and secured
to prevent loosening. In cases where requested by the purchaser and indicated in data sheet
the busbar joints shall be silver plated.
Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the color or the color coding of the busbars
insulation shall be red, yellow and blue for phase busbars and black for neutral busbar,
top to bottom and from left to right when facing the front of the switchgear.
The main horizontal busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout the
length of the switchgear. The cross section and the continuous ampere rating of th
horizontal busbars shall be indicated in data sheet/s.
The vertical busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout their length and
their current rating shall be equal to the sum of the maximum full load ratings of the outgoing
nits connected to that busbar considering the future units which could be installed in empty
The horizontal and vertical busbars shall be capable of withstanding, without damage,
the magnetic forces and the thermal effects created by the maximum specified short circuit
current for at least one second. The busbars short circuit withstands current shall be indicated
in data sheet and shall not be less than 50 kA rms symmetrical.
Main horizontal busbars shall be in separate compartment. The vertical busbars shall
also be in separate compartment and can be installed behind functional units of each vertical
section. The vertical busbars shall be arranged such that accidental finger contact with live
shall be impossible when the breaker/s or starter modules are withdrawn.
Where bus section (tie) breaker/s are specified, they shall be so arranged that one
complete section of busbars and associated connections can be made dead and safe to work
while the adjoining section of busbars is still alive.
The neutral busbar shall extend the entire length of the switchgear and shall be
insulated from the earth potential. The neutral bus shall extend into each incomer
compartment. Means of disconnection (e.g. a bolted link) shall be provided to isolate the
neutral bus from the neutral source for testing purposes. The current rating of the neutral
busbar shall be at least 50% of the phase busbars.
A separate earth busbar, rated for the maximum available earth fault current for one
second, shall run the entire length of the switchgear. Sufficient connection points with
adequate terminating facilities shall be provided for terminating the cables screen and/or
armors. The earth busbar shall be equipped with suitable connectors or bolts to be connected
to earth copper conductors at each end.
The size of earth copper conductors shall be considered accrding to IPS-E-EL
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
, high conductivity copper and shall
Busbars shall be designed for the full rated current at the maximum ambient temperature
specified without exceeding their temperature rise limits. Design of the busbars shall be such
Power and neutral busbars shall be fully insulated with flame retardant non-hygroscopic
insulation material and shall be color coded. Suitable insulation shall be provided for the
bolted joints. The insulation of busbar joints and connections shall be removable for
inspection purposes. Busbar joints and connections shall be corrosion protected and secured
aser and indicated in data sheet
Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the color or the color coding of the busbars
insulation shall be red, yellow and blue for phase busbars and black for neutral busbar, from
top to bottom and from left to right when facing the front of the switchgear.
The main horizontal busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout the
length of the switchgear. The cross section and the continuous ampere rating of the main
The vertical busbars shall be of the same cross sectional area throughout their length and
their current rating shall be equal to the sum of the maximum full load ratings of the outgoing
nits connected to that busbar considering the future units which could be installed in empty
The horizontal and vertical busbars shall be capable of withstanding, without damage,
e maximum specified short circuit
current for at least one second. The busbars short circuit withstands current shall be indicated
shall be in separate compartment. The vertical busbars shall
also be in separate compartment and can be installed behind functional units of each vertical
section. The vertical busbars shall be arranged such that accidental finger contact with live
shall be impossible when the breaker/s or starter modules are withdrawn.
Where bus section (tie) breaker/s are specified, they shall be so arranged that one
complete section of busbars and associated connections can be made dead and safe to work
The neutral busbar shall extend the entire length of the switchgear and shall be
insulated from the earth potential. The neutral bus shall extend into each incomer
ction (e.g. a bolted link) shall be provided to isolate the
neutral bus from the neutral source for testing purposes. The current rating of the neutral
available earth fault current for one
second, shall run the entire length of the switchgear. Sufficient connection points with
adequate terminating facilities shall be provided for terminating the cables screen and/or
ipped with suitable connectors or bolts to be connected
EL-100.
7.3 Wiring, terminals and markings
7.3.1 All internal wiring shall be contin
7.3.2 Wiring shall be stranded copper conductor with flame retardant PVC insulation.
Minimum conductor sizes shall be 2.5 mm
and signal wiring.
7.3.3 In case of direct connection between main busbar and first protection device, the
minimum cross-section size of conductor, shall be at least 4
fixed correctly. This connection in busbar side shall be ring type cable lug.
7.3.4 Where wiring is run through a metal sheet or barrier, bushing or other mechanical
protection shall be provided.
7.3.5 All internal power wiring shall be suitable for the largest continuous current rating of the
functional unit in maximum ambient temperatu
fuses or circuit breakers.
7.3.6 The sizes of earth wires shall be according to the recommendations of IEC 61439
7.3.7 Where applicable, flexible wires shall be used for connection of door mounted
equipment to the cubicle mounted equipment. Such wiring shall be wrapped with flexible
PVC coil or installed in flexible conduit and shall be firmly clamped at both ends to prevent
movement at terminations.
7.3.8 Covers and/or doors with electrical apparatus attach
switchgear frame via bonding conductors.
7.3.9 All wiring shall be numbered on each end with permanently embossed wire markers of
the heat shrinkable type or slip
interconnection drawings.
7.3.10 All wires shall have cable lugs and shall be terminated in clamp type terminals such
that direct contacts between screw, bolt or nut and cable lugs are avoided. For current
transformers secondary wiring circuit,
7.3.11 The terminals shall be identified by suitable permanent numbers in accordance with the
relevant wiring diagrams. Terminal marking shall comply with IEC 60445.
7.3.12 Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one t
provided where more connections are required at one point.
7.3.13 Wiring in various circuit breakers, starter and feeder cubicles performing the same
common function shall bear the same wire and terminal numbers.
7.3.14 The control terminal blocks shall include minimum 10
7.3.15 Nameplates shall comply with IEC 61439
be approved by company representative. Nameplates shall be made of durable corrosion
resistant material.
The nameplates shall at least contain the following information: manufacturer’s name and
trade mark, type designation and
and number of relevant standard.
7.3.16 Labels on withdrawable units sha
fixed part.
April 2019
IPS
9
terminals and markings
All internal wiring shall be continuous from terminal to terminal with no splicing.
Wiring shall be stranded copper conductor with flame retardant PVC insulation.
Minimum conductor sizes shall be 2.5 mm2 for protection (CT/PT), and 1.5 mm
of direct connection between main busbar and first protection device, the
section size of conductor, shall be at least 4 mm2 and the conductor shall be
fixed correctly. This connection in busbar side shall be ring type cable lug.
Where wiring is run through a metal sheet or barrier, bushing or other mechanical
All internal power wiring shall be suitable for the largest continuous current rating of the
functional unit in maximum ambient temperature and the short circuit current as limited by
The sizes of earth wires shall be according to the recommendations of IEC 61439
Where applicable, flexible wires shall be used for connection of door mounted
to the cubicle mounted equipment. Such wiring shall be wrapped with flexible
PVC coil or installed in flexible conduit and shall be firmly clamped at both ends to prevent
Covers and/or doors with electrical apparatus attached to them shall be connected to the
switchgear frame via bonding conductors.
All wiring shall be numbered on each end with permanently embossed wire markers of
the heat shrinkable type or slip-on ferrules. Wire numbers shall match the manufacturer’s
All wires shall have cable lugs and shall be terminated in clamp type terminals such
that direct contacts between screw, bolt or nut and cable lugs are avoided. For current
transformers secondary wiring circuit, ”ring type cable lugs“ shall be used.
The terminals shall be identified by suitable permanent numbers in accordance with the
relevant wiring diagrams. Terminal marking shall comply with IEC 60445.
Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal. Links shall be
provided where more connections are required at one point.
Wiring in various circuit breakers, starter and feeder cubicles performing the same
common function shall bear the same wire and terminal numbers.
terminal blocks shall include minimum 10 % spare terminals.
Nameplates shall comply with IEC 61439-1 and information on the nameplates shall
be approved by company representative. Nameplates shall be made of durable corrosion
The nameplates shall at least contain the following information: manufacturer’s name and
and serial number, date of manufacturing, applicable rated values
and number of relevant standard.
Labels on withdrawable units shall be duplicated on the withdrawable part and the
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
uous from terminal to terminal with no splicing.
Wiring shall be stranded copper conductor with flame retardant PVC insulation.
for protection (CT/PT), and 1.5 mm2 for control
of direct connection between main busbar and first protection device, the
and the conductor shall be
Where wiring is run through a metal sheet or barrier, bushing or other mechanical
All internal power wiring shall be suitable for the largest continuous current rating of the
re and the short circuit current as limited by
The sizes of earth wires shall be according to the recommendations of IEC 61439-1.
Where applicable, flexible wires shall be used for connection of door mounted
to the cubicle mounted equipment. Such wiring shall be wrapped with flexible
PVC coil or installed in flexible conduit and shall be firmly clamped at both ends to prevent
ed to them shall be connected to the
All wiring shall be numbered on each end with permanently embossed wire markers of
on ferrules. Wire numbers shall match the manufacturer’s
All wires shall have cable lugs and shall be terminated in clamp type terminals such
that direct contacts between screw, bolt or nut and cable lugs are avoided. For current
The terminals shall be identified by suitable permanent numbers in accordance with the
relevant wiring diagrams. Terminal marking shall comply with IEC 60445.
erminal. Links shall be
Wiring in various circuit breakers, starter and feeder cubicles performing the same
% spare terminals.
1 and information on the nameplates shall
be approved by company representative. Nameplates shall be made of durable corrosion
The nameplates shall at least contain the following information: manufacturer’s name and
serial number, date of manufacturing, applicable rated values
ll be duplicated on the withdrawable part and the
7.3.17 When operation of certain items of the switchgear needs sequential actions such as the
release of interlocking features, instruction plates shall be provided near the point of
operation.
7.4 Safety considerations and interlocks
7.4.1 The low voltage switchgear and controlgear
under all normal operating and fault conditions. It must be impossible to unwillingly, without
the use of tools, touch live parts of the switchgear or to perform operations that may lead to
arcing faults.
7.4.2 Circuit breakers and feeder units shall be provided with required safety interlocks in
accordance with the functions of such equipment in the overall electrical system and shall
conform to the requirements of IEC 61439. Interlocks shall be mechanical in nature.
7.4.3 Motor starter units shall be equipped with necessary interlocks such that it will not be
possible to open the doors or covers of starter compartments when the isolating switch is in
the ON position. The isolating device shall only be operable when t
closed and/or the withdrawable unit is in the fully inserted position.
7.4.4 The reversing and two speed motor starters shall be equipped with suitable mechanical
interlocks, in addition to the electrical interlocks in the control
7.4.5 All interlocks that prevent potentially dangerous ma
such that they can not be easily defeated. If any mechanical interlock is capable of being
defeated without the use of tools, provision shall be made for
for interlocks and/or padlocking shall be approved by company representative.
7.4.6 When a withdrawable unit has been removed from the switchgear assembly, the live
parts inside the fixed compartments shall be protected against
7.4.7 Arc-barriers shall be arranged such that the propagation of a possible arc is hindered
from one vertical section of the switchgear to another vertical section and also from one
compartment to another compartment of each vertical section.
7.4.8 Temperature rise of current
IEC 60947 and derated in accordance with environmental conditions specified in data sheet.
7.4.9 The complete switchgear assembly shall be capable to withstand the th
dynamic stresses resulting from short circuit currents. The supplier shall state the short circuit
withstand current of the assembly namely busbars, breakers, starters etc. at quotation stage.
7.4.10 All the metallic non-
structure shall be bonded together and connected to the earth busbar. Doors shall be bonded to
the main structure by means of flexible copper connections.
8 Major components
8.1 Incoming air circuit breakers
8.1.1 In the low voltage switchgear, air circuit breakers shall be used for incomer/s to the
switchgear and also for bus coupler/s.
8.1.2 Circuit-breakers used as incomers and bus tie breaker shall be four poles with drawable
air circuit breakers. Molded case circuit
April 2019
IPS
10
When operation of certain items of the switchgear needs sequential actions such as the
release of interlocking features, instruction plates shall be provided near the point of
considerations and interlocks
The low voltage switchgear and controlgear shall offer a maximum degree of safety
under all normal operating and fault conditions. It must be impossible to unwillingly, without
the use of tools, touch live parts of the switchgear or to perform operations that may lead to
it breakers and feeder units shall be provided with required safety interlocks in
accordance with the functions of such equipment in the overall electrical system and shall
conform to the requirements of IEC 61439. Interlocks shall be mechanical in nature.
Motor starter units shall be equipped with necessary interlocks such that it will not be
possible to open the doors or covers of starter compartments when the isolating switch is in
the ON position. The isolating device shall only be operable when the door or cover is fully
closed and/or the withdrawable unit is in the fully inserted position.
The reversing and two speed motor starters shall be equipped with suitable mechanical
interlocks, in addition to the electrical interlocks in the control circuits.
All interlocks that prevent potentially dangerous mal operations must be constructed
such that they can not be easily defeated. If any mechanical interlock is capable of being
defeated without the use of tools, provision shall be made for padlocking. The requirements
for interlocks and/or padlocking shall be approved by company representative.
When a withdrawable unit has been removed from the switchgear assembly, the live
parts inside the fixed compartments shall be protected against touch.
barriers shall be arranged such that the propagation of a possible arc is hindered
from one vertical section of the switchgear to another vertical section and also from one
compartment to another compartment of each vertical section.
Temperature rise of current-carrying parts shall be limited to the values stipulated in
IEC 60947 and derated in accordance with environmental conditions specified in data sheet.
The complete switchgear assembly shall be capable to withstand the th
dynamic stresses resulting from short circuit currents. The supplier shall state the short circuit
withstand current of the assembly namely busbars, breakers, starters etc. at quotation stage.
-current carrying parts of the switchgear including the main
structure shall be bonded together and connected to the earth busbar. Doors shall be bonded to
the main structure by means of flexible copper connections.
air circuit breakers
low voltage switchgear, air circuit breakers shall be used for incomer/s to the
switchgear and also for bus coupler/s.
breakers used as incomers and bus tie breaker shall be four poles with drawable
Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall not be used for such purpose.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
When operation of certain items of the switchgear needs sequential actions such as the
release of interlocking features, instruction plates shall be provided near the point of
shall offer a maximum degree of safety
under all normal operating and fault conditions. It must be impossible to unwillingly, without
the use of tools, touch live parts of the switchgear or to perform operations that may lead to
it breakers and feeder units shall be provided with required safety interlocks in
accordance with the functions of such equipment in the overall electrical system and shall
conform to the requirements of IEC 61439. Interlocks shall be mechanical in nature.
Motor starter units shall be equipped with necessary interlocks such that it will not be
possible to open the doors or covers of starter compartments when the isolating switch is in
he door or cover is fully
The reversing and two speed motor starters shall be equipped with suitable mechanical
operations must be constructed
such that they can not be easily defeated. If any mechanical interlock is capable of being
padlocking. The requirements
for interlocks and/or padlocking shall be approved by company representative.
When a withdrawable unit has been removed from the switchgear assembly, the live
barriers shall be arranged such that the propagation of a possible arc is hindered
from one vertical section of the switchgear to another vertical section and also from one
carrying parts shall be limited to the values stipulated in
IEC 60947 and derated in accordance with environmental conditions specified in data sheet.
The complete switchgear assembly shall be capable to withstand the thermal and
dynamic stresses resulting from short circuit currents. The supplier shall state the short circuit
withstand current of the assembly namely busbars, breakers, starters etc. at quotation stage.
the switchgear including the main
structure shall be bonded together and connected to the earth busbar. Doors shall be bonded to
low voltage switchgear, air circuit breakers shall be used for incomer/s to the
breakers used as incomers and bus tie breaker shall be four poles with drawable
breakers (MCCB) shall not be used for such purpose.
8.1.3 In some cases that the panel feeds only from one transformer or the circuit does not have
any single phase load, three poles circuit breaker may be used for incomers.
8.1.4 Air circuit breakers sha
performance, and shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty (utilization category B).
8.1.5 Both the short-circuit making capacity as well as the short
circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short
place of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in incoming air circuit breaker shall be equa
8.1.6 The performance of circuit breakers as specified in IEC 60947
installed within the assembly for the exact configuration supplied.
8.1.7 Rated currents of circuit breakers shall be selected conforming to IEC recommendations
taking into account possible deratings as per site condition specified in data sheet. Incomer
circuit breakers shall be sized to feed all the loads indicated in the single line diagram
including the spare units and the
infuture.
8.1.8 The short circuit capacity of circuit
short circuit and power factor. The breaking and making short circuit capacities of circuit
breakers as defined in IEC 60947
respectively.
8.1.9 Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the specified short circuit current
without the aid of replaceable current limiters or fuses.
8.1.10 The operating mechanism of
type. The charging of the spring shall be by electric motor and also by manual means. The
charged spring mechanism shall be capable of three circuit breaker operation viz: open, close,
open.
8.1.11 Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with anti
actions of the operating mechanism.
8.1.12 Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the voltage of the spring charging motor as
well as the circuit breaker close and
The 110V dc will be supplied from the substations of dc power supply system. The 230V ac
can be utilized for the spring charging motor if approved by company representative.
8.1.13 Tripping of circuit breakers shall be by means of manual mechanical tripping device
and dc shunt trip coil. Electrical and manual closing release shall be provided. Circuit
breakers shall be suitable for remote control. The purchaser shall indicate the choice of local
or remote control of circuit breakers in data sheet/s.
8.1.14 The local manual trip facility shall be fitted with a guard to preclude inadvertent
operation.
8.1.15 Facilities shall be provided for testing the circuit breaker closing and tripping
mechanisms when the breaker is in TEST position.
8.1.16 There shall be three distinct positions for circuit breakers
shall hold the circuit breaker rigidly in the three positions of CONNECTED, TEST and
DISCONNECTED (Rack Out). The breaker disco
interlocked by the breaker trip
into the cubicle with the breaker in the ON position.
April 2019
IPS
11
In some cases that the panel feeds only from one transformer or the circuit does not have
any single phase load, three poles circuit breaker may be used for incomers.
Air circuit breakers shall conform to IEC 60947-2 in terms of rating, testing and
performance, and shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty (utilization category B).
circuit making capacity as well as the short-circuit breaking capacity of
st be larger than or equal to the prospective short-circuit current at the
place of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in incoming air circuit breaker shall be equa
The performance of circuit breakers as specified in IEC 60947-2 shall be verified when
installed within the assembly for the exact configuration supplied.
Rated currents of circuit breakers shall be selected conforming to IEC recommendations
taking into account possible deratings as per site condition specified in data sheet. Incomer
circuit breakers shall be sized to feed all the loads indicated in the single line diagram
including the spare units and the space units (empty compartments ) which would be installed
The short circuit capacity of circuit-breakers shall be appropriate to the specified system
short circuit and power factor. The breaking and making short circuit capacities of circuit
breakers as defined in IEC 60947-2 shall not be less than 50 kA and 105 kA rms symmetrical
Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the specified short circuit current
without the aid of replaceable current limiters or fuses.
The operating mechanism of air circuit breakers shall be stored energy spring operated
type. The charging of the spring shall be by electric motor and also by manual means. The
charged spring mechanism shall be capable of three circuit breaker operation viz: open, close,
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with anti-pumping devices to prevent pumping
actions of the operating mechanism.
Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the voltage of the spring charging motor as
well as the circuit breaker close and trip voltage shall be 110V dc with individual protection.
110V dc will be supplied from the substations of dc power supply system. The 230V ac
can be utilized for the spring charging motor if approved by company representative.
cuit breakers shall be by means of manual mechanical tripping device
and dc shunt trip coil. Electrical and manual closing release shall be provided. Circuit
breakers shall be suitable for remote control. The purchaser shall indicate the choice of local
remote control of circuit breakers in data sheet/s.
The local manual trip facility shall be fitted with a guard to preclude inadvertent
Facilities shall be provided for testing the circuit breaker closing and tripping
hen the breaker is in TEST position.
There shall be three distinct positions for circuit breakers. The draw
shall hold the circuit breaker rigidly in the three positions of CONNECTED, TEST and
DISCONNECTED (Rack Out). The breaker disconnect device shall be mechanically
interlocked by the breaker trip-shaft to prevent withdrawal or insertion of the breaker from /
into the cubicle with the breaker in the ON position.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
In some cases that the panel feeds only from one transformer or the circuit does not have
any single phase load, three poles circuit breaker may be used for incomers.
2 in terms of rating, testing and
performance, and shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty (utilization category B).
circuit breaking capacity of
circuit current at the
place of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in incoming air circuit breaker shall be equal.
2 shall be verified when
Rated currents of circuit breakers shall be selected conforming to IEC recommendations
taking into account possible deratings as per site condition specified in data sheet. Incomer
circuit breakers shall be sized to feed all the loads indicated in the single line diagram
ich would be installed
breakers shall be appropriate to the specified system
short circuit and power factor. The breaking and making short circuit capacities of circuit
2 shall not be less than 50 kA and 105 kA rms symmetrical
Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the specified short circuit current
air circuit breakers shall be stored energy spring operated
type. The charging of the spring shall be by electric motor and also by manual means. The
charged spring mechanism shall be capable of three circuit breaker operation viz: open, close,
pumping devices to prevent pumping
Unless otherwise indicated in data sheet the voltage of the spring charging motor as
trip voltage shall be 110V dc with individual protection.
110V dc will be supplied from the substations of dc power supply system. The 230V ac
can be utilized for the spring charging motor if approved by company representative.
cuit breakers shall be by means of manual mechanical tripping device
and dc shunt trip coil. Electrical and manual closing release shall be provided. Circuit
breakers shall be suitable for remote control. The purchaser shall indicate the choice of local
The local manual trip facility shall be fitted with a guard to preclude inadvertent
Facilities shall be provided for testing the circuit breaker closing and tripping
he draw-out mechanism
shall hold the circuit breaker rigidly in the three positions of CONNECTED, TEST and
nnect device shall be mechanically
shaft to prevent withdrawal or insertion of the breaker from /
8.1.17 If moving of the circuit breaker from or into the operating position requires undue
effort by the operator, mechanical aids such as handle shall be provided as indicated in article
9.7. The circuit breaker shall be lockable in the TEST and DISCONNECTED po
8.1.18 Circuit breakers shall be equipped with shutters to cover the bus side and cable side
disconnect contacts automatically, upon withdrawal of circuit breaker. Shutters shall be
opened by the circuit breaker as it moves toward connected posit
red for busbar side and yellow for cable side.
8.1.19 Circuit breaker control connections (secondary disconnects) shall be via fixed, self
aligning disconnects, or via flexible cord type plug connection. Either system shall a
operation of the circuit breaker in the test position.
8.1.20 In addition to auxiliary contacts required for circuit breaker operation, at least 2 N/O
and at least 2 N/C similar contacts shall be provided, and wired to the terminal strip. If
additional auxiliary contacts are required, it will be indicated in data sheet.
8.1.21 All auxiliary wiring to and from the circuit breaker shall be terminated on an easily
accessible terminal strip within the breaker compartment with label numbering. Each ter
and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers used in the circuit
diagrams. For similar type of feeders, the numbering procedure shall be identical.
8.1.22 Circuit breakers of identical rating and control voltage shall be completely
interchangeable. It shall not be possible to interchange breakers of different ratings.
8.1.23 Circuit breakers shall have mechanical indicators to show open/close contact posit
and spring charging status. The panel shall also be fitted with red and green indicating lights
as per IEC 60073 recommendations to show whether the breaker is in close or open position.
In addition a yellow indicating light shall be provided to show
8.1.24 Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a trip circuit supervision system complete
with a white indicating lamp to indicate that the trip circuit and trip circuit supply are healthy.
8.1.25 The "indicating lamp test
8.1.26 The incomer circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with the required indicating
instruments and external type protective relays as shown in single line diagram/s and/or data
sheet. Company representative shal
followings shall be provided for each incomer circuit breaker. The relays function numbers
are according to ANSI standard C37.2 (IEEE C37.2)
- Time and instantaneous over current relay. (50/51)
- Time and instantaneous over current ground relay (50N/51N)
- Under voltage and phase sequence voltage protection (27/47)
- Ammeter with selector switch (or three Ammeters one for each phase)
- Voltmeter with phase selector switch
The other protective relays s
8.1.27 The bus tie circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with protective relays and electrical
interlocks as shown in single line diagram/s.
8.1.28 For Manual/Automatic Transfer System (ATS) refer to IPS
the single line diagram/s and/or data sheet/s.
April 2019
IPS
12
If moving of the circuit breaker from or into the operating position requires undue
effort by the operator, mechanical aids such as handle shall be provided as indicated in article
The circuit breaker shall be lockable in the TEST and DISCONNECTED po
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with shutters to cover the bus side and cable side
disconnect contacts automatically, upon withdrawal of circuit breaker. Shutters shall be
opened by the circuit breaker as it moves toward connected position, Shutters shall be colored
red for busbar side and yellow for cable side.
Circuit breaker control connections (secondary disconnects) shall be via fixed, self
aligning disconnects, or via flexible cord type plug connection. Either system shall a
operation of the circuit breaker in the test position.
In addition to auxiliary contacts required for circuit breaker operation, at least 2 N/O
and at least 2 N/C similar contacts shall be provided, and wired to the terminal strip. If
tional auxiliary contacts are required, it will be indicated in data sheet.
All auxiliary wiring to and from the circuit breaker shall be terminated on an easily
accessible terminal strip within the breaker compartment with label numbering. Each ter
and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers used in the circuit
diagrams. For similar type of feeders, the numbering procedure shall be identical.
Circuit breakers of identical rating and control voltage shall be completely
interchangeable. It shall not be possible to interchange breakers of different ratings.
Circuit breakers shall have mechanical indicators to show open/close contact posit
and spring charging status. The panel shall also be fitted with red and green indicating lights
as per IEC 60073 recommendations to show whether the breaker is in close or open position.
In addition a yellow indicating light shall be provided to show trip on fault condition.
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a trip circuit supervision system complete
with a white indicating lamp to indicate that the trip circuit and trip circuit supply are healthy.
indicating lamp test" provisions shall be provided for the feeders.
The incomer circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with the required indicating
instruments and external type protective relays as shown in single line diagram/s and/or data
sheet. Company representative shall approve built-in type protective relays. At least the
followings shall be provided for each incomer circuit breaker. The relays function numbers
are according to ANSI standard C37.2 (IEEE C37.2)
Time and instantaneous over current relay. (50/51)
and instantaneous over current ground relay (50N/51N)
Under voltage and phase sequence voltage protection (27/47)
Ammeter with selector switch (or three Ammeters one for each phase)
Voltmeter with phase selector switch
The other protective relays shall be provided according to single line diagram/s.
The bus tie circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with protective relays and electrical
interlocks as shown in single line diagram/s.
For Manual/Automatic Transfer System (ATS) refer to IPS-E-EL-
the single line diagram/s and/or data sheet/s.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
If moving of the circuit breaker from or into the operating position requires undue
effort by the operator, mechanical aids such as handle shall be provided as indicated in article
The circuit breaker shall be lockable in the TEST and DISCONNECTED positions.
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with shutters to cover the bus side and cable side
disconnect contacts automatically, upon withdrawal of circuit breaker. Shutters shall be
ion, Shutters shall be colored
Circuit breaker control connections (secondary disconnects) shall be via fixed, self-
aligning disconnects, or via flexible cord type plug connection. Either system shall allow test-
In addition to auxiliary contacts required for circuit breaker operation, at least 2 N/O
and at least 2 N/C similar contacts shall be provided, and wired to the terminal strip. If
All auxiliary wiring to and from the circuit breaker shall be terminated on an easily
accessible terminal strip within the breaker compartment with label numbering. Each terminal
and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers used in the circuit
diagrams. For similar type of feeders, the numbering procedure shall be identical.
Circuit breakers of identical rating and control voltage shall be completely
interchangeable. It shall not be possible to interchange breakers of different ratings.
Circuit breakers shall have mechanical indicators to show open/close contact positions
and spring charging status. The panel shall also be fitted with red and green indicating lights
as per IEC 60073 recommendations to show whether the breaker is in close or open position.
trip on fault condition.
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a trip circuit supervision system complete
with a white indicating lamp to indicate that the trip circuit and trip circuit supply are healthy.
visions shall be provided for the feeders.
The incomer circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with the required indicating
instruments and external type protective relays as shown in single line diagram/s and/or data
in type protective relays. At least the
followings shall be provided for each incomer circuit breaker. The relays function numbers
hall be provided according to single line diagram/s.
The bus tie circuit breaker/s shall be equipped with protective relays and electrical
100, if indicated in
8.2 Motor controllers
8.2.1 In the low voltage switchgear motor starters feeder, shall be withdrawable and installed
in individual compartments. The number and motor rating will be indicated in the single line
diagram/s and/or data sheet.
8.2.2 Unless otherwise indicated in single line diagram/s the motor starters for single speed,
two speed and reversing motors shall be direct
requirements of IEC 60947-4.
8.2.3 Motor starters installed in low voltage switchgear are intended to control 3 phase 400
volt electrical loads and/or motors up to 150kW rating. (The voltage of 150kW motors can be
400 volt or 6kv depending upon the availability of such voltages).
8.2.4 Motor starters at least shall consist of the following components as per IPS
− HRC fuses with isolator, or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB, without overload
protection), or motor protection circuit breaker (MPCB, without overload protection) with
approval of company representative
− Contactor
− Essential protective relays
− Other optional protection relays, control devices and indicating instruments shown on
the single line diagram/s and/or specified in this specification.
8.2.5 Both the short-circuit making capacity as well as the short
molded case circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short
current at the place of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and
rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in molded case circuit breaker shall be
equal.
8.2.6 All motor starter feeders shall meet the requirements of IEC 60947
shall be type “2” co-ordination and the manufacturer shall supply required documents to
company representative.
8.2.7 Switch-fuse combination units shall comply with IEC 60947
duty, utilization category AC-
without opening a cover. The HRC fuse links shall be in accordance with IEC 60269
8.2.8 Contactors shall be three pole magnetically operated air
category AC-3 according to IEC 60947
services contactors with utilization category AC
8.2.9 In addition to the load contacts and the auxiliary contacts required to operate the starter,
at least one N/O and one N/C auxiliary contacts shall be provided for each contactor and shall
be wired to the terminal block of the compartment.
8.2.10 Control scheme of motor starters shall be as per the requirements, shown in control
circuit schematic diagrams.
8.2.11 The rated voltage of control circuit shall be single phase 230 volt ac supplied by
isolated control transformer in each individual cells or in each motor starter unit as specified
by company representative. The control circuit shall be protected by a suitably rated
case where the purchaser specifies other control voltages in the data sheet or in the single line
diagram/s, necessary auxiliaries shall be provided for such purpose.
April 2019
IPS
13
In the low voltage switchgear motor starters feeder, shall be withdrawable and installed
dual compartments. The number and motor rating will be indicated in the single line
Unless otherwise indicated in single line diagram/s the motor starters for single speed,
two speed and reversing motors shall be direct-on-line and shall be in accordance with the
Motor starters installed in low voltage switchgear are intended to control 3 phase 400
volt electrical loads and/or motors up to 150kW rating. (The voltage of 150kW motors can be
400 volt or 6kv depending upon the availability of such voltages).
Motor starters at least shall consist of the following components as per IPS
HRC fuses with isolator, or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB, without overload
motor protection circuit breaker (MPCB, without overload protection) with
approval of company representative
Essential protective relays
Other optional protection relays, control devices and indicating instruments shown on
am/s and/or specified in this specification.
circuit making capacity as well as the short-circuit breaking capacity of
molded case circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short
nstallation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and
rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in molded case circuit breaker shall be
All motor starter feeders shall meet the requirements of IEC 60947
ordination and the manufacturer shall supply required documents to
fuse combination units shall comply with IEC 60947-3 suitable for uninterrupted
-23. Isolators shall be operable from the front of the switchgear
without opening a cover. The HRC fuse links shall be in accordance with IEC 60269
Contactors shall be three pole magnetically operated air-break type rated for utilization
ng to IEC 60947-4. For induction motors in inching or reversing
services contactors with utilization category AC-4 shall be used.
In addition to the load contacts and the auxiliary contacts required to operate the starter,
C auxiliary contacts shall be provided for each contactor and shall
be wired to the terminal block of the compartment.
Control scheme of motor starters shall be as per the requirements, shown in control
oltage of control circuit shall be single phase 230 volt ac supplied by
isolated control transformer in each individual cells or in each motor starter unit as specified
by company representative. The control circuit shall be protected by a suitably rated
case where the purchaser specifies other control voltages in the data sheet or in the single line
diagram/s, necessary auxiliaries shall be provided for such purpose.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
In the low voltage switchgear motor starters feeder, shall be withdrawable and installed
dual compartments. The number and motor rating will be indicated in the single line
Unless otherwise indicated in single line diagram/s the motor starters for single speed,
line and shall be in accordance with the
Motor starters installed in low voltage switchgear are intended to control 3 phase 400
volt electrical loads and/or motors up to 150kW rating. (The voltage of 150kW motors can be
Motor starters at least shall consist of the following components as per IPS-E-EL-100:
HRC fuses with isolator, or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB, without overload
motor protection circuit breaker (MPCB, without overload protection) with
Other optional protection relays, control devices and indicating instruments shown on
circuit breaking capacity of
molded case circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short-circuit
nstallation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and
rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in molded case circuit breaker shall be
All motor starter feeders shall meet the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1. These feeders
ordination and the manufacturer shall supply required documents to
3 suitable for uninterrupted
rs shall be operable from the front of the switchgear
without opening a cover. The HRC fuse links shall be in accordance with IEC 60269-1.
break type rated for utilization
4. For induction motors in inching or reversing
In addition to the load contacts and the auxiliary contacts required to operate the starter,
C auxiliary contacts shall be provided for each contactor and shall
Control scheme of motor starters shall be as per the requirements, shown in control
oltage of control circuit shall be single phase 230 volt ac supplied by
isolated control transformer in each individual cells or in each motor starter unit as specified
by company representative. The control circuit shall be protected by a suitably rated fuse. In
case where the purchaser specifies other control voltages in the data sheet or in the single line
8.2.12 Where the capacitive current of control cables are larger than the current related to
holding power (sealing power) of the contactor coil, the manufacturer shall comply the
requirements for using a larger contactor with bigger holding power. Other solutio
approval by company representative are acceptable. Company will submit control cable
schedule.
8.2.13 Motor starters shall include a change over Test/Normal selector switch for testing the
operation of starters when isolated from the main circuit.
which is isolated from the main circuit shall be connected to a male plug located within each
starter unit. In this position the starter can be tested when control voltage is supplied to such
male plug.
8.2.14 Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, one 230V test voltage supply unit (supplied
from isolated transformer) equipped with isolating device and appropriate fuse rated to supply
the control circuit of the largest starter unit shall be provided on each bus
voltage supply unit shall be accommodated in a dedicated compartment and shall be
connected to two pole sockets (at least two numbers) mounted on the compartment door.
8.2.15 Flexible cords with matching plugs and socket shall be supp
connecting test voltage to the male plugs in each starter unit as specified in paragraph
The flexible cords shall have sufficient length to connect the test voltage to all starter units on
each section of the switchgear fo
8.2.16 Motor starters shall be equipped with start/stop
requirements of article 9.1 of this specification.
8.2.17 Stay-put type stop/reset push
shall be provided on the front of all motor starters. Unless otherwise indicated in single line
diagram/s no start push button is required on the starter compartment. (Except for testing as
per paragraph 8.2.13.)
8.2.18 Each starter module shall be
the door of the starter compartment.
-Red to show the ON status,
-Green to show OFF status,
-Yellow to show FAULT status.
8.2.19 For motor starters up to 30kW, thermal overload relays with direct
electronical shall be provided. In addition to such overload protection, suitable single phasing
protection shall also be included so that the contactor shall trip whenever a single phasing
condition develops. The thermal or electronica
temperature compensated and adjustable type. Uniform trip
between 0oC and 50
oC. Adjustment range of thermal relays shall be calibrated directly in
ampere. Reset shall be via a door
8.2.20 For motor starters 30kW and above current transformer operated overload relays shall
be used. For such motors instantaneous earth fault protection relay supplied from a core
balance current transformer shall also be prov
the contactors about 10% of the full load motor current. In addition to overload and earth fault
protection relays, single phasing protection relay shall also be included.
8.2.21 Motor starters shall als
process requirement and indicated in the single line diagram/s.
April 2019
IPS
14
Where the capacitive current of control cables are larger than the current related to
holding power (sealing power) of the contactor coil, the manufacturer shall comply the
requirements for using a larger contactor with bigger holding power. Other solutio
approval by company representative are acceptable. Company will submit control cable
Motor starters shall include a change over Test/Normal selector switch for testing the
operation of starters when isolated from the main circuit. In test position, the control circuit
which is isolated from the main circuit shall be connected to a male plug located within each
starter unit. In this position the starter can be tested when control voltage is supplied to such
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, one 230V test voltage supply unit (supplied
from isolated transformer) equipped with isolating device and appropriate fuse rated to supply
the control circuit of the largest starter unit shall be provided on each busbar section. The test
voltage supply unit shall be accommodated in a dedicated compartment and shall be
connected to two pole sockets (at least two numbers) mounted on the compartment door.
Flexible cords with matching plugs and socket shall be supplied by manufacturer for
connecting test voltage to the male plugs in each starter unit as specified in paragraph
The flexible cords shall have sufficient length to connect the test voltage to all starter units on
each section of the switchgear for testing purposes.
Motor starters shall be equipped with start/stop local control stations according to the
.1 of this specification.
put type stop/reset push-button accessible from outside of the starter compa
shall be provided on the front of all motor starters. Unless otherwise indicated in single line
diagram/s no start push button is required on the starter compartment. (Except for testing as
Each starter module shall be equipped with the following indicating lights installed on
the door of the starter compartment.
Red to show the ON status,
Green to show OFF status,
Yellow to show FAULT status.
For motor starters up to 30kW, thermal overload relays with direct
electronical shall be provided. In addition to such overload protection, suitable single phasing
protection shall also be included so that the contactor shall trip whenever a single phasing
condition develops. The thermal or electronical overload relays shall be three
temperature compensated and adjustable type. Uniform trip- characteristics shall be obtained
C. Adjustment range of thermal relays shall be calibrated directly in
a door-mounted push-button.
For motor starters 30kW and above current transformer operated overload relays shall
be used. For such motors instantaneous earth fault protection relay supplied from a core
balance current transformer shall also be provided. Earth fault relays shall be adjustable to trip
the contactors about 10% of the full load motor current. In addition to overload and earth fault
protection relays, single phasing protection relay shall also be included.
Motor starters shall also include other protective or control relays stipulated by the
process requirement and indicated in the single line diagram/s.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Where the capacitive current of control cables are larger than the current related to
holding power (sealing power) of the contactor coil, the manufacturer shall comply the
requirements for using a larger contactor with bigger holding power. Other solutions with
approval by company representative are acceptable. Company will submit control cable
Motor starters shall include a change over Test/Normal selector switch for testing the
In test position, the control circuit
which is isolated from the main circuit shall be connected to a male plug located within each
starter unit. In this position the starter can be tested when control voltage is supplied to such
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, one 230V test voltage supply unit (supplied
from isolated transformer) equipped with isolating device and appropriate fuse rated to supply
bar section. The test
voltage supply unit shall be accommodated in a dedicated compartment and shall be
connected to two pole sockets (at least two numbers) mounted on the compartment door.
lied by manufacturer for
connecting test voltage to the male plugs in each starter unit as specified in paragraph 8.2.13.
The flexible cords shall have sufficient length to connect the test voltage to all starter units on
local control stations according to the
button accessible from outside of the starter compartment
shall be provided on the front of all motor starters. Unless otherwise indicated in single line
diagram/s no start push button is required on the starter compartment. (Except for testing as
equipped with the following indicating lights installed on
heating element or
electronical shall be provided. In addition to such overload protection, suitable single phasing
protection shall also be included so that the contactor shall trip whenever a single phasing
l overload relays shall be three-phase, ambient
characteristics shall be obtained
C. Adjustment range of thermal relays shall be calibrated directly in
For motor starters 30kW and above current transformer operated overload relays shall
be used. For such motors instantaneous earth fault protection relay supplied from a core
ided. Earth fault relays shall be adjustable to trip
the contactors about 10% of the full load motor current. In addition to overload and earth fault
o include other protective or control relays stipulated by the
8.2.22 Relays shall be according to article 9.3 of this specification. Microprocessor type motor
protection relays are acceptabl
8.2.23 All motor starters of 4
the starter front panel. This ammeter shall be fed from a current transformer installed on the
middle phase. Such starters shall also be fitted with a 1 Ampere s
for remote indication of motor current. The ammeter fed from this current transformer will be
installed in the relevant local motor control station.
8.2.24 For motors less than 4 kW no ammeter is required on the starter panel,
ammeter shall be provided on the local control stations when such motors are not visible from
starting position.
8.2.25 Starter modules of identical rating and control scheme shall be fully interchangeable.
Units which are mechanically identical b
e.g. it shall not be possible to install a motor starter unit into a space for a feeder unit of the
same size.
8.2.26 Fully equipped spare motor starters shall be provided as specified in paragraph 7.1
8.3 Other outgoing feeders (rather than motor type)
8.3.1 The low voltage switchgear may include outgoing feeder switch fuses or air circuit
breakers. The type and sizes of feeder switch fuses or feeder breakers will be indicated in the
single line diagram/s and/or data sheet.
8.3.2 Outgoing Feeder circuit brea
breaker (MCCB) type, when approved by company representative. For ratings above 400
Ampere, the air circuit breaker type shall be used.
8.3.3 Outgoing Feeder circuit breakers or switch fuses shall be installed in individual
compartments.
8.3.4 The circuit breakers and switch fuses shall be in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-3.
8.3.5 Outgoing feeders with rating of
ammeter with selector switch or three ammeters (one for each phase).
8.3.6 Each terminal and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers
used in the circuit diagrams. For similar type
shall be identical.
8.3.7 Both the short-circuit making capacity as well as the short
circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short
place of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in outgoing air circuit breaker shall be equal.
9 Auxiliary components
9.1 Local motor control stations
9.1.1 Local motor control stations will be located near the motors which they control. If motor
control stations are to be supplied together with the switchgear
sheet. The mentioned requirements shall be according to IPS
April 2019
IPS
15
Relays shall be according to article 9.3 of this specification. Microprocessor type motor
protection relays are acceptable.
kW and above shall be provided with one ammeter installed on
the starter front panel. This ammeter shall be fed from a current transformer installed on the
middle phase. Such starters shall also be fitted with a 1 Ampere secondary current transformer
for remote indication of motor current. The ammeter fed from this current transformer will be
installed in the relevant local motor control station.
For motors less than 4 kW no ammeter is required on the starter panel,
ammeter shall be provided on the local control stations when such motors are not visible from
Starter modules of identical rating and control scheme shall be fully interchangeable.
Units which are mechanically identical but electrically different shall not be interchangeable
e.g. it shall not be possible to install a motor starter unit into a space for a feeder unit of the
Fully equipped spare motor starters shall be provided as specified in paragraph 7.1
outgoing feeders (rather than motor type)
The low voltage switchgear may include outgoing feeder switch fuses or air circuit
breakers. The type and sizes of feeder switch fuses or feeder breakers will be indicated in the
single line diagram/s and/or data sheet.
Outgoing Feeder circuit breakers rated up to 400 Ampere can be molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) type, when approved by company representative. For ratings above 400
Ampere, the air circuit breaker type shall be used.
Outgoing Feeder circuit breakers or switch fuses shall be installed in individual
The circuit breakers and switch fuses shall be in accordance with the requirements of
3.
Outgoing feeders with rating of 100 Ampere and above shall be provided with one
ammeter with selector switch or three ammeters (one for each phase).
Each terminal and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers
used in the circuit diagrams. For similar type of outgoing feeders, the numbering procedure
circuit making capacity as well as the short-circuit breaking capacity of
circuit breakers must be larger than or equal to the prospective short-circuit current at the
lace of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in outgoing air circuit breaker shall be equal.
motor control stations
ontrol stations will be located near the motors which they control. If motor
control stations are to be supplied together with the switchgear, it shall be indicated in data
sheet. The mentioned requirements shall be according to IPS-M-EL-161.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Relays shall be according to article 9.3 of this specification. Microprocessor type motor
kW and above shall be provided with one ammeter installed on
the starter front panel. This ammeter shall be fed from a current transformer installed on the
econdary current transformer
for remote indication of motor current. The ammeter fed from this current transformer will be
For motors less than 4 kW no ammeter is required on the starter panel, however,
ammeter shall be provided on the local control stations when such motors are not visible from
Starter modules of identical rating and control scheme shall be fully interchangeable.
ut electrically different shall not be interchangeable
e.g. it shall not be possible to install a motor starter unit into a space for a feeder unit of the
Fully equipped spare motor starters shall be provided as specified in paragraph 7.1.8.
The low voltage switchgear may include outgoing feeder switch fuses or air circuit
breakers. The type and sizes of feeder switch fuses or feeder breakers will be indicated in the
kers rated up to 400 Ampere can be molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) type, when approved by company representative. For ratings above 400
Outgoing Feeder circuit breakers or switch fuses shall be installed in individual
The circuit breakers and switch fuses shall be in accordance with the requirements of
100 Ampere and above shall be provided with one
Each terminal and each wire shall be clearly identified by the same symbols or numbers
of outgoing feeders, the numbering procedure
circuit breaking capacity of
circuit current at the
lace of installation. The rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and rated service
short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) in outgoing air circuit breaker shall be equal.
ontrol stations will be located near the motors which they control. If motor
it shall be indicated in data
9.1.2 Unless otherwise stated in control philosophy, the local motor control station shall at
least include start-stop pushbuttons together with suitable ammeter as required. The ammeter
can be located on the associated control station. It shall be possible to lock
in stop position.
9.1.3 Separate current transformers shall be mounted in the motor starter compartments to be
connected to ammeters at motor control stations in accordance with the requirement of article
9.4.
9.1.4 Terminals shall be provided in the starter compartments to be connected to the ammeter
and push buttons installed on the local motor control stations.
9.1.5 Local motor control stations shall be suitable for outdoor installation in classified areas
and shall be according to the relevant IPS standard.
9.1.6 Unless otherwise stated in control philosephy, “Local
Auto” tri-state selector switches shall be provided on Local Control Stations, when indicated
on the single line diagram/s. The “Off position” in tri
as “no-state” and shall not cause to stop the motor.
9.2 Instruments
9.2.1 Indicating and measuring instruments shall be provided as shown on single line
diagrams and/or data sheet.
9.2.2 All instruments shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of IEC
60051.
9.2.3 Where indicated in the single line diagram/s and or data sheet, 4
transducer/s complying with IEC 60688 shall be provided for selected analogue signa
transmitted to a remote supervisory system such as distributed control system (DCS).
9.2.4 Measuring instruments shall be flush mounting type and shall have an enclosure with at
least a degree of protection of IP41 and IP55 for indoor and outdoor
9.2.5 Measuring instruments shall be operative by the passage of fault currents in the primary
of current transformers or voltage variations on the system within the specified system
characteristics.
9.2.6 Analog ammeters, voltme
better. The accuracy class of the above digital devices shall be class 1.0
9.2.7 Ammeters for motor duty shall be analogstarting currents and shall have a compressed overload scale of at least 6 times the full load motor current. Scales for such ammeters shall be selected at least 120% of nominal load current appears in meter. Full load motor current shall be indicated by a red line on the ammeter scale.
9.2.8 All analog meters installed on the switchgear shall be of the square pattern type 72
× 72 mm. 96 mm × 96 mm meters are acceptable, but 72
shall be in actual values.
9.3 Protective relays
9.3.1 The protection function codes shown on single line diagram/s will be according to the
latest edition of ANSI standard C37.2. (IEEE C37.2) and
April 2019
IPS
16
ss otherwise stated in control philosophy, the local motor control station shall at
stop pushbuttons together with suitable ammeter as required. The ammeter
can be located on the associated control station. It shall be possible to lock
Separate current transformers shall be mounted in the motor starter compartments to be
connected to ammeters at motor control stations in accordance with the requirement of article
Terminals shall be provided in the starter compartments to be connected to the ammeter
and push buttons installed on the local motor control stations.
motor control stations shall be suitable for outdoor installation in classified areas
all be according to the relevant IPS standard.
Unless otherwise stated in control philosephy, “Local-Off-Remote” or “Manual
state selector switches shall be provided on Local Control Stations, when indicated
s. The “Off position” in tri-state selector switches may be defined
state” and shall not cause to stop the motor.
Indicating and measuring instruments shall be provided as shown on single line
All instruments shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of IEC
Where indicated in the single line diagram/s and or data sheet, 4
transducer/s complying with IEC 60688 shall be provided for selected analogue signa
transmitted to a remote supervisory system such as distributed control system (DCS).
Measuring instruments shall be flush mounting type and shall have an enclosure with at
least a degree of protection of IP41 and IP55 for indoor and outdoor applications, repectively.
Measuring instruments shall be operative by the passage of fault currents in the primary
of current transformers or voltage variations on the system within the specified system
Analog ammeters, voltmeters and watt-hour meters shall be of the accuracy class 1.5 or
better. The accuracy class of the above digital devices shall be class 1.0 or better.
Ammeters for motor duty shall be analog-type and suitable to withstand the motor and shall have a compressed overload scale of at least 6 times the full load
motor current. Scales for such ammeters shall be selected at least 120% of nominal load current appears in meter. Full load motor current shall be indicated by a red line on the
All analog meters installed on the switchgear shall be of the square pattern type 72
96 mm meters are acceptable, but 72 mm × 72 mm is preferred. Scales
ection function codes shown on single line diagram/s will be according to the
latest edition of ANSI standard C37.2. (IEEE C37.2) and IPS-E-EL-100.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ss otherwise stated in control philosophy, the local motor control station shall at
stop pushbuttons together with suitable ammeter as required. The ammeter
can be located on the associated control station. It shall be possible to lock the control station
Separate current transformers shall be mounted in the motor starter compartments to be
connected to ammeters at motor control stations in accordance with the requirement of article
Terminals shall be provided in the starter compartments to be connected to the ammeter
motor control stations shall be suitable for outdoor installation in classified areas
Remote” or “Manual-Off-
state selector switches shall be provided on Local Control Stations, when indicated
state selector switches may be defined
Indicating and measuring instruments shall be provided as shown on single line
All instruments shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of IEC
Where indicated in the single line diagram/s and or data sheet, 4-20mA output
transducer/s complying with IEC 60688 shall be provided for selected analogue signals to be
transmitted to a remote supervisory system such as distributed control system (DCS).
Measuring instruments shall be flush mounting type and shall have an enclosure with at
applications, repectively.
Measuring instruments shall be operative by the passage of fault currents in the primary
of current transformers or voltage variations on the system within the specified system
hour meters shall be of the accuracy class 1.5 or
or better.
type and suitable to withstand the motor and shall have a compressed overload scale of at least 6 times the full load
motor current. Scales for such ammeters shall be selected at least 120% of nominal load current appears in meter. Full load motor current shall be indicated by a red line on the
All analog meters installed on the switchgear shall be of the square pattern type 72 mm
72 mm is preferred. Scales
ection function codes shown on single line diagram/s will be according to the
9.3.2 All protective relays with the same function shall be similar type and interchangeable.
Prefferably the relays to be such that, the removal of each relay automatically short circuits
the relevant current transformer.
9.3.3 All protective relays shall have
shall be configurable. Each protection function shall be activated individually. Activating and
de-activating each protective function does not disturb other function operation in any way.
9.3.4 Each incomer and bus-tie shall be equipped with microprocessor type protection relays.
Protection scheme shall be based on failsafe scheme and watchdog (self
must be provided in these relays to indicate the health of the device. This device
hardwired contacts for sending alaram signals.
9.3.5 Relays shall be equipped with clear trip indication, visible to the operator.
9.3.6 Relays shall be manually resetable.
9.3.7 An external electromechanical lockout relay (86) shall be install
equipped with ACB, to prohibit automatic restart after a failure (except thermal overload 49).
It can be reset only manually.
9.3.8 In all feeders equipped with ACB, the secondary terminals of each current and voltage
transformers shall be connected to accessible test block
9.3.9 If programmable digital protective relays are employed, the relevant softwares together
with instruction manuals and trouble shooting guidelines shall be included.
9.4 Current transformers
9.4.1 Current transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 61869
9.4.2 The rated secondary current shall be 1 or 5 Ampere for protective relays and 5 Ampere
for measuring devices mounted in switchgears. For remote mounted instruments, rated
secondary current shall be 1 Ampere, either directly or via intermediate current transformers.
9.4.3 The switchgear manufacturer shall be responsible for assessing and selecting the output
rating of the current transformers. If there is any discrepancy from single line diagram of
company representative, the manufacturer shall present sizing calculations of the output rating
of the current transformers for confirmation of client.
9.4.4 Current transformers for measuring purposes shall be of the accuracy class 1 or better .
Current transformers for remote ammeters shall be of the accuracy class 3 or better.
9.4.5 Current transformers for protection purposes shall be of the accuracy class 5P. The
accuracy class of current transformers used for motor protection relays shall be as speci
by the relay manufacturer. In such case class 10P will be acceptable. The accuracy class of
differential protection (ANSI code 87) current transformers shall be class X as defined in IEC
61869-2.
9.4.6 The secondary of the current transformers shall b
transformers are connected in Y, the Y point shall be earthed. The wiring of the secondary
circuits shall be at least cross section of 2.5 mm
9.4.7 Secondary terminals of current transformers shall be wired up to ter
short-circuiting link, located at an accessible place.
9.4.8 Current transformers for circuit breakers shall be installed in the stationary part of the
relevant cubicle. Current transformers for motor starters shall be installed in the wit
part of the cubicle.
April 2019
IPS
17
All protective relays with the same function shall be similar type and interchangeable.
Prefferably the relays to be such that, the removal of each relay automatically short circuits
the relevant current transformer.
protective relays shall have provision for testing and microprocessor type relays
shall be configurable. Each protection function shall be activated individually. Activating and
activating each protective function does not disturb other function operation in any way.
tie shall be equipped with microprocessor type protection relays.
Protection scheme shall be based on failsafe scheme and watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts
must be provided in these relays to indicate the health of the device. This device
hardwired contacts for sending alaram signals.
Relays shall be equipped with clear trip indication, visible to the operator.
Relays shall be manually resetable.
An external electromechanical lockout relay (86) shall be install
equipped with ACB, to prohibit automatic restart after a failure (except thermal overload 49).
In all feeders equipped with ACB, the secondary terminals of each current and voltage
be connected to accessible test block.
If programmable digital protective relays are employed, the relevant softwares together
with instruction manuals and trouble shooting guidelines shall be included.
transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 61869-2.
The rated secondary current shall be 1 or 5 Ampere for protective relays and 5 Ampere
for measuring devices mounted in switchgears. For remote mounted instruments, rated
e 1 Ampere, either directly or via intermediate current transformers.
The switchgear manufacturer shall be responsible for assessing and selecting the output
rating of the current transformers. If there is any discrepancy from single line diagram of
company representative, the manufacturer shall present sizing calculations of the output rating
of the current transformers for confirmation of client.
Current transformers for measuring purposes shall be of the accuracy class 1 or better .
transformers for remote ammeters shall be of the accuracy class 3 or better.
Current transformers for protection purposes shall be of the accuracy class 5P. The
accuracy class of current transformers used for motor protection relays shall be as speci
by the relay manufacturer. In such case class 10P will be acceptable. The accuracy class of
differential protection (ANSI code 87) current transformers shall be class X as defined in IEC
The secondary of the current transformers shall be earthed on one side. Where current
transformers are connected in Y, the Y point shall be earthed. The wiring of the secondary
circuits shall be at least cross section of 2.5 mm2.
Secondary terminals of current transformers shall be wired up to ter
circuiting link, located at an accessible place.
Current transformers for circuit breakers shall be installed in the stationary part of the
relevant cubicle. Current transformers for motor starters shall be installed in the wit
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
All protective relays with the same function shall be similar type and interchangeable.
Prefferably the relays to be such that, the removal of each relay automatically short circuits
provision for testing and microprocessor type relays
shall be configurable. Each protection function shall be activated individually. Activating and
activating each protective function does not disturb other function operation in any way.
tie shall be equipped with microprocessor type protection relays.
monitoring) contacts
must be provided in these relays to indicate the health of the device. This device shall have
Relays shall be equipped with clear trip indication, visible to the operator.
An external electromechanical lockout relay (86) shall be installed on all feeders
equipped with ACB, to prohibit automatic restart after a failure (except thermal overload 49).
In all feeders equipped with ACB, the secondary terminals of each current and voltage
If programmable digital protective relays are employed, the relevant softwares together
with instruction manuals and trouble shooting guidelines shall be included.
The rated secondary current shall be 1 or 5 Ampere for protective relays and 5 Ampere
for measuring devices mounted in switchgears. For remote mounted instruments, rated
e 1 Ampere, either directly or via intermediate current transformers.
The switchgear manufacturer shall be responsible for assessing and selecting the output
rating of the current transformers. If there is any discrepancy from single line diagram of
company representative, the manufacturer shall present sizing calculations of the output rating
Current transformers for measuring purposes shall be of the accuracy class 1 or better .
transformers for remote ammeters shall be of the accuracy class 3 or better.
Current transformers for protection purposes shall be of the accuracy class 5P. The
accuracy class of current transformers used for motor protection relays shall be as specified
by the relay manufacturer. In such case class 10P will be acceptable. The accuracy class of
differential protection (ANSI code 87) current transformers shall be class X as defined in IEC
e earthed on one side. Where current
transformers are connected in Y, the Y point shall be earthed. The wiring of the secondary
Secondary terminals of current transformers shall be wired up to terminal block with
Current transformers for circuit breakers shall be installed in the stationary part of the
relevant cubicle. Current transformers for motor starters shall be installed in the withdrawable
9.4.9 Current transformers shall be capable of carrying, the specified fault current of the
switchgear, without injurious heating or mechanical damage.
9.4.10 Current transformers shall have appropriate VA rating and security
factor shall not be less than 5.
9.4.11 The markings on the current transformer shall be in accordance with the requirements
of IEC 61869-2.
9.5 Voltage transformers
9.5.1 When voltage transformers are indicated in single line diagram
accordance with IEC 61869-3, with secondary voltage as specified by the manufacturer of
protective and/or measuring instruments.
9.5.2 Voltage transformers shall be protected by disconnect type current limiting fuses on
primary side and fuses or miniature circuit breakers (MCB) on secondary side.
9.5.3 The secondary winding of voltage transformers shall be earthed at one end, through a
removable link.
9.5.4 Voltage transformers shall be air insulated with accuracy class 1 for measuring an
for protection.
9.6 Anti-Condensation heaters
9.6.1 Anti-condensation heaters shall be rated for continuous service and shall operate on
single phase voltage of 230Volt, 50Hz.
9.6.2 The numbers and sizes of the heaters, if not shown on drawings, shall
switchgear supplier. In such case the use of one heater in each cubicle is recommended.
9.6.3 The heaters shall be fed from dedicated power supply. This power supply system may
be energized from a dedicated heater panel, independent
distribution panel. The panels feeding the heaters in one section of the switchgear shall be fed
from the opposite section of the bus bar.
9.6.4 Heater/s in each cubicle shall be protected by a miniature circuit breaker and an earth
leakage protection device or residual circuit breaker of 30
9.6.5 In each cubicle a thermostat/hygrostat shall be provided for the operation of heater/s
indicating light (preferably blue) shall be provided on the enclosure to indicate that the
relevant space heater/s is in operation.
9.6.6 Heater/s terminals shall have safety cover .
9.7 Accessories
9.7.1 Accessories required for proper and safe opera
At least the following accessories shall be furnished for each assembly or group of assemblies
in the same switch room.
a) Device for manually charging the stored energy operating mechanism of circuit
breakers.
b) Handle for moving circuit breakers into positions.
c) Lifting trolley or similar device to remove circuit breakers or large starter modules from
the cubicles.
April 2019
IPS
18
Current transformers shall be capable of carrying, the specified fault current of the
switchgear, without injurious heating or mechanical damage.
Current transformers shall have appropriate VA rating and security factor. The security
The markings on the current transformer shall be in accordance with the requirements
When voltage transformers are indicated in single line diagram
3, with secondary voltage as specified by the manufacturer of
protective and/or measuring instruments.
Voltage transformers shall be protected by disconnect type current limiting fuses on
fuses or miniature circuit breakers (MCB) on secondary side.
The secondary winding of voltage transformers shall be earthed at one end, through a
Voltage transformers shall be air insulated with accuracy class 1 for measuring an
condensation heaters shall be rated for continuous service and shall operate on
single phase voltage of 230Volt, 50Hz.
The numbers and sizes of the heaters, if not shown on drawings, shall
switchgear supplier. In such case the use of one heater in each cubicle is recommended.
The heaters shall be fed from dedicated power supply. This power supply system may
be energized from a dedicated heater panel, independent lighting panel, or electrical
distribution panel. The panels feeding the heaters in one section of the switchgear shall be fed
from the opposite section of the bus bar.
Heater/s in each cubicle shall be protected by a miniature circuit breaker and an earth
leakage protection device or residual circuit breaker of 30 mA sensitivity
In each cubicle a thermostat/hygrostat shall be provided for the operation of heater/s
indicating light (preferably blue) shall be provided on the enclosure to indicate that the
relevant space heater/s is in operation.
Heater/s terminals shall have safety cover .
Accessories required for proper and safe operation of the switchgear shall be supplied.
At least the following accessories shall be furnished for each assembly or group of assemblies
Device for manually charging the stored energy operating mechanism of circuit
Handle for moving circuit breakers into positions.
Lifting trolley or similar device to remove circuit breakers or large starter modules from
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Current transformers shall be capable of carrying, the specified fault current of the
factor. The security
The markings on the current transformer shall be in accordance with the requirements
When voltage transformers are indicated in single line diagram, they shall be in
3, with secondary voltage as specified by the manufacturer of
Voltage transformers shall be protected by disconnect type current limiting fuses on
fuses or miniature circuit breakers (MCB) on secondary side.
The secondary winding of voltage transformers shall be earthed at one end, through a
Voltage transformers shall be air insulated with accuracy class 1 for measuring and 3P
condensation heaters shall be rated for continuous service and shall operate on
The numbers and sizes of the heaters, if not shown on drawings, shall be selected by the
switchgear supplier. In such case the use of one heater in each cubicle is recommended.
The heaters shall be fed from dedicated power supply. This power supply system may
lighting panel, or electrical
distribution panel. The panels feeding the heaters in one section of the switchgear shall be fed
Heater/s in each cubicle shall be protected by a miniature circuit breaker and an earth
In each cubicle a thermostat/hygrostat shall be provided for the operation of heater/s. An
indicating light (preferably blue) shall be provided on the enclosure to indicate that the
tion of the switchgear shall be supplied.
At least the following accessories shall be furnished for each assembly or group of assemblies
Device for manually charging the stored energy operating mechanism of circuit
Lifting trolley or similar device to remove circuit breakers or large starter modules from
d) Adapter cables and/or flexible cords for testing the withdrawable starter modules in
withdrawn (out) positions.
e) Test cabinet for testing circuit breakers, if required (optional).
f) Special tools for erection and maintenance.
10 Tests and inspection
10.1 The equipment under this specification shall be factory tested. Three certified copies of
test reports and certificates shall be submitted to the purchaser.
10.2 Fully type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on the low voltage switchgear and
its componenets according to requirements of the recommendations of IEC series 60947, and
61439 and the relevant IEC publications referred to therein and related certificates shall be
presented. Sample tests according to mentioned standards shall be accomplished by company
representative request.
10.3 Purchaser will require the presence of his nomi
based on IEC requirements as per agreed Quality Control Plan (QCP) and Inspection Test
Plan (ITP). The supplier shall inform the date of such tests at least four weeks in advance.
10.4 The purchaser’s inspectors sh
manufacture and testing.
10.5 Prior to shipment of the switchgear an insulation resistance test shall be performed
between each phase and neutral against earth, with the remaining phases and neutral
connected to earth. The insulation resistance measured shall not be less than 5 mega
Also visual inspection and spot checks shall be carried out to verify at least the following:
a) The degree of protection of the enclosure;
b) The degree of protection within the compartments;
c) The effectiveness and reliability of safety shutters, partitions and shrouds;
d) The effectiveness and reliability of operating mechanisms, locks and interlock systems;
e) The insulation of the busbar system;
f) The creepage distances and clearances;
g) The proper mounting of components;
h) The internal wiring and cabling system;
i) The correct wiring of main and auxiliary circuits
j) The suitability of clamping, earthing and terminating arrangements;
k) The correct labeling of functional units;
l) The completeness of the data on the nameplates;
m) The availability of the earthing system throughout the switchgear;
n) The interchangeability of electrically identical components;
o) The non-interchangeability of mechanic
withdrawable units.
April 2019
IPS
19
Adapter cables and/or flexible cords for testing the withdrawable starter modules in
Test cabinet for testing circuit breakers, if required (optional).
Special tools for erection and maintenance.
The equipment under this specification shall be factory tested. Three certified copies of
est reports and certificates shall be submitted to the purchaser.
Fully type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on the low voltage switchgear and
its componenets according to requirements of the recommendations of IEC series 60947, and
9 and the relevant IEC publications referred to therein and related certificates shall be
presented. Sample tests according to mentioned standards shall be accomplished by company
Purchaser will require the presence of his nominated representative to witness the tests
based on IEC requirements as per agreed Quality Control Plan (QCP) and Inspection Test
Plan (ITP). The supplier shall inform the date of such tests at least four weeks in advance.
The purchaser’s inspectors shall be granted the right for inspection at any stage of
Prior to shipment of the switchgear an insulation resistance test shall be performed
between each phase and neutral against earth, with the remaining phases and neutral
onnected to earth. The insulation resistance measured shall not be less than 5 mega
Also visual inspection and spot checks shall be carried out to verify at least the following:
The degree of protection of the enclosure;
protection within the compartments;
The effectiveness and reliability of safety shutters, partitions and shrouds;
The effectiveness and reliability of operating mechanisms, locks and interlock systems;
The insulation of the busbar system;
creepage distances and clearances;
The proper mounting of components;
The internal wiring and cabling system;
The correct wiring of main and auxiliary circuits
The suitability of clamping, earthing and terminating arrangements;
labeling of functional units;
The completeness of the data on the nameplates;
The availability of the earthing system throughout the switchgear;
The interchangeability of electrically identical components;
interchangeability of mechanically identical but electrically different
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Adapter cables and/or flexible cords for testing the withdrawable starter modules in
The equipment under this specification shall be factory tested. Three certified copies of
Fully type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on the low voltage switchgear and
its componenets according to requirements of the recommendations of IEC series 60947, and
9 and the relevant IEC publications referred to therein and related certificates shall be
presented. Sample tests according to mentioned standards shall be accomplished by company
nated representative to witness the tests
based on IEC requirements as per agreed Quality Control Plan (QCP) and Inspection Test
Plan (ITP). The supplier shall inform the date of such tests at least four weeks in advance.
all be granted the right for inspection at any stage of
Prior to shipment of the switchgear an insulation resistance test shall be performed
between each phase and neutral against earth, with the remaining phases and neutral
onnected to earth. The insulation resistance measured shall not be less than 5 mega-ohms.
Also visual inspection and spot checks shall be carried out to verify at least the following:
The effectiveness and reliability of safety shutters, partitions and shrouds;
The effectiveness and reliability of operating mechanisms, locks and interlock systems;
ally identical but electrically different
11 Spare parts
11.1 Together with the supply of all equipment under this specification, a complete set of
spare parts for commissioning shall be supplied for each switchgear. The supplied spar
shall comply with the same specifications as the original parts and shall be fully
interchangeable with the original parts without any modification.
11.2 The vendor shall also supply a list of recommended spare parts for two years of
operation.
12 Documentation
12.1 The vendor shall supply the necessary information with the quotation to enable
evaluation of the submitted proposal. General documents /drawings are not acceptable unless
they are revised to show the equipment proposed. The documents t
quotation shall at least include the following:
a) Completed enquiry data sheet/s.
b) Summary of exceptions/deviations to this standard specification.
c) Brochures and catalogues containing description of typical switchgear and techn
on major and auxiliary components such as circuit breakers, contactors, relays, meters etc
d) List of accessories included in the bid.
e) Preliminary dimensional drawings.
f) Approximate shipping weights and sizes.
12.2 The documents which sh
the following:
a) Generated drawings and schematics shall be delivered in native type and hardcopy.
b) Updated and completed enquiry data sheet/s.
c) Final single line diagram/s.
d) Schematic control circuit diagrams of each kind of circuit breaker and starter module.
e) General arrangement drawings showing main dimensions, panels’ layout, floor panel
and shipping sections.
f) Drawing/s showing the location of field wiring terminal s
connections.
g) Information concerning interlock sequences and all logic diagrams if applicable.
h) List of major and auxiliary components, showing complete reordering information for
all replaceable parts.
i) Recommended spare parts
j) Test reports and performance curves of the final routine tests.
k) Painting specification and test result/s.
l) Applicable test certificates as stated in IEC61439
m) Installation, operation and maintenance instruction/s.
n) Fault finding and trouble shooting manual/s.
April 2019
IPS
20
Together with the supply of all equipment under this specification, a complete set of
spare parts for commissioning shall be supplied for each switchgear. The supplied spar
shall comply with the same specifications as the original parts and shall be fully
interchangeable with the original parts without any modification.
The vendor shall also supply a list of recommended spare parts for two years of
The vendor shall supply the necessary information with the quotation to enable
evaluation of the submitted proposal. General documents /drawings are not acceptable unless
they are revised to show the equipment proposed. The documents to be supplied with the
quotation shall at least include the following:
Completed enquiry data sheet/s.
Summary of exceptions/deviations to this standard specification.
Brochures and catalogues containing description of typical switchgear and techn
on major and auxiliary components such as circuit breakers, contactors, relays, meters etc
List of accessories included in the bid.
Preliminary dimensional drawings.
Approximate shipping weights and sizes.
The documents which shall be supplied together with the equipment shall at least include
Generated drawings and schematics shall be delivered in native type and hardcopy.
Updated and completed enquiry data sheet/s.
Final single line diagram/s.
Schematic control circuit diagrams of each kind of circuit breaker and starter module.
General arrangement drawings showing main dimensions, panels’ layout, floor panel
Drawing/s showing the location of field wiring terminal strips and power cable
Information concerning interlock sequences and all logic diagrams if applicable.
List of major and auxiliary components, showing complete reordering information for
Recommended spare parts list for two years of operation.
Test reports and performance curves of the final routine tests.
Painting specification and test result/s.
Applicable test certificates as stated in IEC61439-2 and Annex D of IEC 61439
Installation, operation and maintenance instruction/s.
Fault finding and trouble shooting manual/s.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Together with the supply of all equipment under this specification, a complete set of
spare parts for commissioning shall be supplied for each switchgear. The supplied spare parts
shall comply with the same specifications as the original parts and shall be fully
The vendor shall also supply a list of recommended spare parts for two years of
The vendor shall supply the necessary information with the quotation to enable
evaluation of the submitted proposal. General documents /drawings are not acceptable unless
o be supplied with the
Brochures and catalogues containing description of typical switchgear and technical data
on major and auxiliary components such as circuit breakers, contactors, relays, meters etc.
all be supplied together with the equipment shall at least include
Generated drawings and schematics shall be delivered in native type and hardcopy.
Schematic control circuit diagrams of each kind of circuit breaker and starter module.
General arrangement drawings showing main dimensions, panels’ layout, floor panel
trips and power cable
Information concerning interlock sequences and all logic diagrams if applicable.
List of major and auxiliary components, showing complete reordering information for
2 and Annex D of IEC 61439-1
o) Protective relay/s types, curves and setting ranges.
p) Cut-off current characteristics of fuses.
q) Total weight of the assembly and weight of the
r) List of accessories and/or any special tools required for erection, operation and
maintenance.
13 Shipment
13.1 The supplier of the equipment under this specification is the sole responsible for
packaging and preparation for shipment.
13.2 The packaging and preparation for shipment shall be adequate to avoid mechanical
damage during transport, handling and stacking.
13.3 Each shipping section shall be provided with permanently attached identification tag
containing necessary information together with the switchgear identification number indicated
in data sheet Annex A.
13.4 Shipping documents with exact description of equipment for custom release shall be
supplied, with the equipment.
14 Guarantee
14.1 The supplier of the equipment under this specification shall guarantee the equipment and
shall replace any damaged equipment/parts resulting from poor workmanship and / or faulty
design.
14.2 The supplier shall replace any equipment failed under the foll
- Failure under startup and commissioning tests performed according to IEC
recommendations.
- Failure under normal usage for a period of 12 months, not exceeding 18 months from the
delivery date to company.
April 2019
IPS
21
Protective relay/s types, curves and setting ranges.
off current characteristics of fuses.
Total weight of the assembly and weight of the individual shipping sections.
List of accessories and/or any special tools required for erection, operation and
The supplier of the equipment under this specification is the sole responsible for
or shipment.
The packaging and preparation for shipment shall be adequate to avoid mechanical
damage during transport, handling and stacking.
Each shipping section shall be provided with permanently attached identification tag
ry information together with the switchgear identification number indicated
Shipping documents with exact description of equipment for custom release shall be
The supplier of the equipment under this specification shall guarantee the equipment and
shall replace any damaged equipment/parts resulting from poor workmanship and / or faulty
The supplier shall replace any equipment failed under the following condition:
Failure under startup and commissioning tests performed according to IEC
Failure under normal usage for a period of 12 months, not exceeding 18 months from the
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
individual shipping sections.
List of accessories and/or any special tools required for erection, operation and
The supplier of the equipment under this specification is the sole responsible for
The packaging and preparation for shipment shall be adequate to avoid mechanical
Each shipping section shall be provided with permanently attached identification tag
ry information together with the switchgear identification number indicated
Shipping documents with exact description of equipment for custom release shall be
The supplier of the equipment under this specification shall guarantee the equipment and
shall replace any damaged equipment/parts resulting from poor workmanship and / or faulty
owing condition:
Failure under startup and commissioning tests performed according to IEC
Failure under normal usage for a period of 12 months, not exceeding 18 months from the
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear data sheet
The vendor shall complete and submit this data sheet with its proposal.
Items marked with asterisk will be specified by purchaser.
No.
1. Name of project or plant
2. Switchgear identification No
3. Single line diagram number
4. Site elevation above sea level (m)
5. Maximum indoor temperature
6. Minimum indoor temperature
7. 24 hr. average indoor temperature
8. Maximum outdoor ambient temperature
9. Minimum outdoor ambient temperature
10. Relative humidity
11. Pollution Degree
12. Installation (indoor/ outdoor)
13. Area classification zones,( in case of outdoor installation)
14. Nominal system voltage, 3phase and neutral
15. System voltage variation
16. Nominal frequency and frequency variation
17. Neutral earthing system (solidly earthed)
18. Incomers to the switchgear by duct or cable
19. Enclosure degree of protection (IP code)
20. External Mechanical Impact (IK code)
21. Ics, Icu, Icw, Icm
22. Form of internal separation of the enclosure
23. Degree of protection of separation partitions or barriers (IP code)
24. Plate thickness of the enclosure
25. Color of the enclosure
26. Power busbars cross section
27. Busbars rated current
28. Busbars short circuit withstand current rms symmetrical
29. Busbars short circuit withstand time
30. Busbars insulation
31. Busbars colors, phases and neutral
32. Busbars joints silver plated or not
33. Total length of the switchgear
34. Height of the switchgear
35. Depth of the switchgear
April 2019
IPS
22
Annex A
(Normative)
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear data sheet
The vendor shall complete and submit this data sheet with its proposal.
Items marked with asterisk will be specified by purchaser.
Subject
Name of project or plant
Switchgear identification No
Single line diagram number
Site elevation above sea level (m)
Maximum indoor temperature
Minimum indoor temperature
24 hr. average indoor temperature
Maximum outdoor ambient temperature
Minimum outdoor ambient temperature
Relative humidity
Installation (indoor/ outdoor)
Area classification zones,( in case of outdoor installation)
Nominal system voltage, 3phase and neutral
System voltage variation
Nominal frequency and frequency variation
Neutral earthing system (solidly earthed)
Incomers to the switchgear by duct or cable
Enclosure degree of protection (IP code)
External Mechanical Impact (IK code)
Form of internal separation of the enclosure
Degree of protection of separation partitions or barriers (IP code)
Plate thickness of the enclosure
Color of the enclosure
Power busbars cross section
Busbars rated current
Busbars short circuit withstand current rms symmetrical
Busbars short circuit withstand time
Busbars insulation
Busbars colors, phases and neutral
joints silver plated or not
Total length of the switchgear
Height of the switchgear
Depth of the switchgear
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
No.
36. Shipping weight of the switchgear/individual shipping sections
37. Numbers of incomer circuit breaker/s
38. Numbers of bus tie circuit breaker/s
39. Tie breaker/s mode of operation OPEN/CLOSE
40. Numbers of poles and current rating of incomer and tie breakers
41. Circuit breakers interrupting medium (if different than air)
42. Circuit breakers closing mechanism (direct manual/motor driven)
43. Circuit breakers breaking capacity rms symmetrical at 1sec and 3sec.
44. Circuit breakers breaking capacity (kA) rms
45. Circuit breakers making capacity (kA) asymmetrical
46. Opening time of circuit breakers
47. Closing time of circuit breakers
48. The voltage of the spring charging motor of circuit breakers
49. Circuit breakers closing and tripping voltage
50. Control of circuit breakers (local/remote)
51. Circuit breakers protective relays
52. Circuit breakers indicating instruments
53. Watt-hour meter for incomers (supplied or not)
54. Additional auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers (paragraph 6.1.19)
55. Numbers and sizes of outgoing feeders
56. Type of outgoing feeders (ACB/MCCB/switch fuse)
57. Numbers and motor rating
58. Motor starters isolating means (fused isolator/MCCB)
59. Motor starters control voltage
60. Motor starters protection relays
61. Motor starters indicating instruments
62. Motor control stations (to be included or not)
63. CT type and ratio for protection and indication metering
64. CT type and ratio for remote ammeter (on control station)
65. Numbers and wattage of anti
66. 4-20 mA output transducers
67. Manufacturer of circuit breakers
68. Manufacturer of contactors
69. Manufacturer of switch fuses and MCCB’s
70. Manufacturer of protective relays
71. Manufacturer of indicating instruments
72. Type test certificates for complete switchgear and components.
73. Accessories
74. Deviation from this specification if any
April 2019
IPS
23
Subject
Shipping weight of the switchgear/individual shipping sections
Numbers of incomer circuit breaker/s
Numbers of bus tie circuit breaker/s
Tie breaker/s mode of operation OPEN/CLOSE
Numbers of poles and current rating of incomer and tie breakers
Circuit breakers interrupting medium (if different than air)
Circuit breakers closing mechanism (direct manual/motor driven)
Circuit breakers breaking capacity rms symmetrical at 1sec and 3sec.
Circuit breakers breaking capacity (kA) rms asymmetrical
Circuit breakers making capacity (kA) asymmetrical
Opening time of circuit breakers
Closing time of circuit breakers
The voltage of the spring charging motor of circuit breakers
Circuit breakers closing and tripping voltage
Control of circuit breakers (local/remote)
Circuit breakers protective relays
Circuit breakers indicating instruments
for incomers (supplied or not)
Additional auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers (paragraph 6.1.19)
Numbers and sizes of outgoing feeders
Type of outgoing feeders (ACB/MCCB/switch fuse)
Numbers and motor rating
Motor starters isolating means (fused isolator/MCCB)
Motor starters control voltage
Motor starters protection relays
Motor starters indicating instruments
Motor control stations (to be included or not)
CT type and ratio for protection and indication metering
CT type and ratio for remote ammeter (on control station)
Numbers and wattage of anti-condensation heaters (if any)
ut transducers 4-20 mA
Manufacturer of circuit breakers
Manufacturer of contactors
Manufacturer of switch fuses and MCCB’s
Manufacturer of protective relays
Manufacturer of indicating instruments
Type test certificates for complete switchgear and components.
Deviation from this specification if any
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
*
Attach list or
diagram/s Attach list or
diagram/s
*
Attach list or
diagram/s
Attach list or
diagram/s
Attach list or
diagram/s Attach list or
diagram/s
*
To be
attached
Attach list
Attach list
Additional requirements for
This standard mainly specifies switchgears for indoor installation. Where this standard
specification is used for the manufacture of outdoor equipment the following clauses shall
also be taken into consideration.
B.1 Service Condition
- The outdoor ambient air temperat
type low voltage switchgear shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient
conditions.
- Outdoor type switchgear shall be installed in safe area according to the recommendations
of IEC 60079-10 and API RP
- This standard specification does not cover the switchgears suitable for installation in
hazardous areas (zone 1 and zone 2).
- Equipment intended to be used in ambient air temperature above +40°C (e.g. in
boiler rooms, tropical atmosphere) or below
series for outdoor installed low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies) should be
designed or used according to the relevant product standard, where
to agreement between manufacturer and user
catalogue may take the place of such an agreement.
- Ambient air temperature(s) for certain types of equipment, e.g. circuit
relays for starters, is indicated in the relevant product standard.
B.2 General requirements
B.2.1 Enclosure
- The enclosure of the outdoor type switchgear shall provide a degree of protection of
IP55W according to IEC 60529 or the switchgear shall be
or cubicle with a degree of protection of IP55W. Each section of the enclosure shall be
equipped with a hinged front door with provision for padlocking.
- Each section of outdoor type enclosure shall include anti
to article 9.6 of this standard specification.
- Within each section of outdoor type enclosure one lamp receptacle with on/off switch for
interior illumination and one 230 Volt receptacle with integral ground fault protection for
electric tools shall be provided.
- Outdoor type switchgear shall always be provided with suitable rain and sun canopy.
April 2019
IPS
24
Annex B
(Normative)
dditional requirements for outdoor low voltage switchgear
mainly specifies switchgears for indoor installation. Where this standard
specification is used for the manufacture of outdoor equipment the following clauses shall
also be taken into consideration.
The outdoor ambient air temperatures are indicated in data sheet Annex
type low voltage switchgear shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient
Outdoor type switchgear shall be installed in safe area according to the recommendations
0 and API RP 505.
This standard specification does not cover the switchgears suitable for installation in
hazardous areas (zone 1 and zone 2).
Equipment intended to be used in ambient air temperature above +40°C (e.g. in
boiler rooms, tropical atmosphere) or below –5°C (e.g. –25 °C, as required by IEC 61439
series for outdoor installed low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies) should be
designed or used according to the relevant product standard, where applicable, or according
to agreement between manufacturer and user. Information given in the manufacturer’s
catalogue may take the place of such an agreement.
Ambient air temperature(s) for certain types of equipment, e.g. circuit-breakers or overload
starters, is indicated in the relevant product standard.
The enclosure of the outdoor type switchgear shall provide a degree of protection of
IP55W according to IEC 60529 or the switchgear shall be housed in a non walk
or cubicle with a degree of protection of IP55W. Each section of the enclosure shall be
equipped with a hinged front door with provision for padlocking.
Each section of outdoor type enclosure shall include anti-condensation heater conforming
.6 of this standard specification.
Within each section of outdoor type enclosure one lamp receptacle with on/off switch for
interior illumination and one 230 Volt receptacle with integral ground fault protection for
ric tools shall be provided.
Outdoor type switchgear shall always be provided with suitable rain and sun canopy.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
outdoor low voltage switchgear
mainly specifies switchgears for indoor installation. Where this standard
specification is used for the manufacture of outdoor equipment the following clauses shall
Annex A. The outdoor
type low voltage switchgear shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient
Outdoor type switchgear shall be installed in safe area according to the recommendations
This standard specification does not cover the switchgears suitable for installation in
Equipment intended to be used in ambient air temperature above +40°C (e.g. in forges,
25 °C, as required by IEC 61439
series for outdoor installed low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies) should be
applicable, or according
Information given in the manufacturer’s
breakers or overload
The enclosure of the outdoor type switchgear shall provide a degree of protection of
housed in a non walk-in cabinet
or cubicle with a degree of protection of IP55W. Each section of the enclosure shall be
on heater conforming
Within each section of outdoor type enclosure one lamp receptacle with on/off switch for
interior illumination and one 230 Volt receptacle with integral ground fault protection for
Outdoor type switchgear shall always be provided with suitable rain and sun canopy.
B.2.2 Busbars
- The busbars for outdoor type switchgear shall be silver coated and shall conform to
article 7.2 of this standard specifica
B.3 Major components
B.3.1 Circuit breaker
- Air circuit breakers in outdoor switchgear shall be stored energy spring operated type and
shall be equipped with manual charging mechanism. Manual operating mechanism for
closing and tripping of such circuit breakers shall also be provided.
April 2019
IPS
25
The busbars for outdoor type switchgear shall be silver coated and shall conform to
.2 of this standard specification.
Air circuit breakers in outdoor switchgear shall be stored energy spring operated type and
shall be equipped with manual charging mechanism. Manual operating mechanism for
closing and tripping of such circuit breakers shall also be provided.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
The busbars for outdoor type switchgear shall be silver coated and shall conform to
Air circuit breakers in outdoor switchgear shall be stored energy spring operated type and
shall be equipped with manual charging mechanism. Manual operating mechanism for
نبايد بدون رضايت كتبي وزارت نفت ايران، تمام يا بخشي از .اين استاندارد، به هر شكل يا وسيله ازجمله تكثير، ذخيره سازي، انتقال، يا روش ديگري در اختيار افراد ثالث قرار گيرد
استاندارد كالا و تجهيزات براي تابلوهاي برق قدرت و فرمان فشار
IPS-
نبايد بدون رضايت كتبي وزارت نفت ايران، تمام يا بخشي از تمام حقوق آن متعلق به مالك آن بوده و. اين استاندارد متعلق به وزارت نفت ايران استاين استاندارد، به هر شكل يا وسيله ازجمله تكثير، ذخيره سازي، انتقال، يا روش ديگري در اختيار افراد ثالث قرار گيرد
استاندارد كالا و تجهيزات براي تابلوهاي برق قدرت و فرمان فشار
الزامات فني - ضعيف
سومويرايش
1398 فروردين
-M-EL-143(3)
اين استاندارد متعلق به وزارت نفت ايران استاين استاندارد، به هر شكل يا وسيله ازجمله تكثير، ذخيره سازي، انتقال، يا روش ديگري در اختيار افراد ثالث قرار گيرد
استاندارد كالا و تجهيزات براي تابلوهاي برق قدرت و فرمان فشار
منعكس كننده ديدگاههاي وزارت نفت ايران است و براي استفاده در تأسيسات توليد نفت و گاز، پالايشگاههاي نفت، واحدهاي شيميائي و پتروشيمي، تأسيسات انتقال و فراورش
هائي از يه شده و شامل گزيدهاستانداردهاي نفت، براساس استانداردهاي قابل قبول بين المللي تههمچنين براساس تجربيات صنعت نفت كشور و قابليت تأمين كالا از بازار
مواردي از . داخلي و نيز برحسب نياز، مواردي بطور تكميلي و يا اصلاحي در اين استاندارد لحاظ شده استها بصورت شماره گذاري شده براي
استانداردهاي نفت، بشكلي كاملا انعطاف پذير تدوين شده است تا كاربران بتوانند نيازهاي خود را با آنها در اين گونه موارد بايد . ش ندهندهاي پروژه ها را پوش
اين الحاقيه همراه با استاندارد . نمايد تهيه و پيوست نمايند
ها در اين بررسي. گردند ته و روزآمد مياي به آن اضافه شود و بنابراين همواره آخرين ويرايش آنها ملاك
اي كه براي نظرها و پيشنهادات اصلاحي و يا هرگونه الحاقيههاي فني نظرات و پيشنهادات دريافتي در كميته
.مربوطه بررسي و در صورت تصويب در تجديد نظرهاي بعدي استاندارد منعكس خواهد شد 17ايران، تهران، خيابان كريمخان زند، خردمند شمالي، كوچه چهاردهم، شماره
April 2019
IPS
ب
منعكس كننده ديدگاههاي وزارت نفت ايران است و براي استفاده در )IPS(استانداردهاي نفت ايران تأسيسات توليد نفت و گاز، پالايشگاههاي نفت، واحدهاي شيميائي و پتروشيمي، تأسيسات انتقال و فراورش
.گاز و ساير تأسيسات مشابه تهيه شده استاستانداردهاي نفت، براساس استانداردهاي قابل قبول بين المللي ته
همچنين براساس تجربيات صنعت نفت كشور و قابليت تأمين كالا از بازار . باشد استانداردهاي مرجع ميداخلي و نيز برحسب نياز، مواردي بطور تكميلي و يا اصلاحي در اين استاندارد لحاظ شده است
ها بصورت شماره گذاري شده براي ه نشده است در داده برگهاي فني كه در متن استانداردها آورد .استفاده مناسب كاربران آورده شده است
استانداردهاي نفت، بشكلي كاملا انعطاف پذير تدوين شده است تا كاربران بتوانند نيازهاي خود را با آنها هاي پروژه ها را پوش با اين حال ممكن است تمام نيازمندي
نمايد تهيه و پيوست نمايند اي كه نيازهاي خاص آنها را تامين مي .مربوطه، مشخصات فني آن پروژه و يا كار خاص را تشكيل خواهند داد
ته و روزآمد مياستانداردهاي نفت تقريبا هر پنج سال يكبار مورد بررسي قرار گرفاي به آن اضافه شود و بنابراين همواره آخرين ويرايش آنها ملاك ممكن است استانداردي حذف و يا الحاقيه
نظرها و پيشنهادات اصلاحي و يا هرگونه الحاقيه شود نقطه از كاربران استاندارد، درخواست مينظرات و پيشنهادات دريافتي در كميته. اند، به نشاني زير ارسال نمايند تهيه نموده
مربوطه بررسي و در صورت تصويب در تجديد نظرهاي بعدي استاندارد منعكس خواهد شدايران، تهران، خيابان كريمخان زند، خردمند شمالي، كوچه چهاردهم، شماره
هاپروژهها و
1585886851 66153055و 88810459
88810462 Standards@nioc.ir
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
پيش گفتار
استانداردهاي نفت ايران تأسيسات توليد نفت و گاز، پالايشگاههاي نفت، واحدهاي شيميائي و پتروشيمي، تأسيسات انتقال و فراورش
گاز و ساير تأسيسات مشابه تهيه شده استاستانداردهاي نفت، براساس استانداردهاي قابل قبول بين المللي ته
استانداردهاي مرجع ميداخلي و نيز برحسب نياز، مواردي بطور تكميلي و يا اصلاحي در اين استاندارد لحاظ شده است
هاي فني كه در متن استانداردها آورد گزينهاستفاده مناسب كاربران آورده شده است
استانداردهاي نفت، بشكلي كاملا انعطاف پذير تدوين شده است تا كاربران بتوانند نيازهاي خود را با آنها با اين حال ممكن است تمام نيازمندي. منطبق نمايند
اي كه نيازهاي خاص آنها را تامين مي الحاقيهمربوطه، مشخصات فني آن پروژه و يا كار خاص را تشكيل خواهند داد
استانداردهاي نفت تقريبا هر پنج سال يكبار مورد بررسي قرار گرفممكن است استانداردي حذف و يا الحاقيه
.عمل مي باشداز كاربران استاندارد، درخواست مي
تهيه نموده موارد خاصمربوطه بررسي و در صورت تصويب در تجديد نظرهاي بعدي استاندارد منعكس خواهد شد
ايران، تهران، خيابان كريمخان زند، خردمند شمالي، كوچه چهاردهم، شماره ها و استانداردهاي طرح
1585886851: كدپستي 88810459 - 60: تلفن
88810462: دور نگار Standards@nioc.ir: پست الكترونيك
صفحه
د
1
1
4
6
8
8
9
15
23
28
29
30
31
31
33
36 رونييب محيط فيضع
April 2019
IPS
ج
مندرجات فهرست
كاربرد
ف
تابلو
يفن ي
فيضع ولتاژ فرمان و قدرت يتابلو برگ داده)
ضع فشار فرمان و قدرت يتابلو يبرا يليتكم الزامات)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
عنوان
مقدمه
كاربرد دامنه و هدف 1
يالزام مراجع 2
فيتعار و اصطلاحات 3
ياتيعمل طيشرا 4
واحدها 5
كاربرد 6
يعموم الزامات 7
تابلو ياصل يها قسمت 8
يكمك قطعات 9
يبازرس و ها شيآزما 10
يدكي لوازم 11
مدارك 12
نقل و حمل 13
يگارانت 14
:هاپيوست
) الزامي( الف پيوست
) الزامي( ب پيوست
اي از متخصصين، نمايندگان و با اتفاق نظر طيف گستردهيره ذيربط و ها و غ آزمايشگاهي، سازندگان، انجمن
هاي مرجع استانداردهاي تدوين شده از سوي وزارت نفت هر پنج سال يكبار بطور سيستماتيك توسط كميتهتخصصي مورد بررسي قرار گرفته و با توجه به قابليت اجرايي و تأثيرگذاري آنها، نسبت به تأييد، ابطال و يا
روش 4بديهي است مطابق بند . شود انگليسي، و فارسي متن بين اختلاف
IPS-M-EL-140(0) از 1383در خرداد سال .شده است
مربوط به راه انداز و متعلقات كنترل موتورهاي فشار
IPS- توسط 1397باشد كه در سال مي .باشد استاندارد منسوخ مي ينا)
اداره كل نظام فني و اجرايي و ارزشيابي ،
هاي واجد صلاحيت هستند كه وظايف تعيين و بازنگري استانداردها را براي
April 2019
IPS
د
و با اتفاق نظر طيف گسترده 1هاي مرجع تخصصي اين استاندارد در كميتهآزمايشگاهي، سازندگان، انجمن - ها، نهادها و مراكز تحقيقاتيها، مديريت
.ذينفع تدوين شده استاستانداردهاي تدوين شده از سوي وزارت نفت هر پنج سال يكبار بطور سيستماتيك توسط كميته
تخصصي مورد بررسي قرار گرفته و با توجه به قابليت اجرايي و تأثيرگذاري آنها، نسبت به تأييد، ابطال و يا شوداقدام لازم انجام مي وزارت نفتتجديدنظر آنها مطابق با مقررات جاري
اختلاف صورت در. شود انجام هنگام زود تواندمي بازنگري .باشد مي
(0)140 يففشارضع يتابلوها يبرا يرگ يچئاستاندارد سو ينا
شده است يلتبد) 1(نظرشده يدبه صورت تجد يررده خارج شده، و به دو استاندارد مجزا در ز يفقدرت و فرمان فشار ضع يتابلوها
يقدرت و فرمان فشار متوسط و فشار قو يتابلوها
IPS-M-EL-142(0) وIPS-M-EL-165(0) مربوط به راه انداز و متعلقات كنترل موتورهاي فشار .ضعيف نيز از رده خارج شدند
M-EL-143(2)-استاندارد دو زبانه نسخه بازنگري شده استاندارد
) 2( يرايشاز اين پس و .گردد يم يهارا) 3( يرايشكميته فني مربوطه انجام و به عنوان و
استانداردهاي صنعت نفت ايران
، 17خردمند شمالي، كوچه چهاردهم، شماره خيابان كريمخان زند، ، معاونت استانداردها1585886851 )021( 61623055و )021(
021( standards@nioc.ir
هاي واجد صلاحيت هستند كه وظايف تعيين و بازنگري استانداردها را براي هاي مرجع تخصصي استاندارد، كميته .بر عهده دارند) هاي دولتي، خصوصي و تعاوني
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
مقدمه
اين استاندارد در كميتهها، مديريت ها، شركتسازمان
ذينفع تدوين شده استاستانداردهاي تدوين شده از سوي وزارت نفت هر پنج سال يكبار بطور سيستماتيك توسط كميته
تخصصي مورد بررسي قرار گرفته و با توجه به قابليت اجرايي و تأثيرگذاري آنها، نسبت به تأييد، ابطال و يا تجديدنظر آنها مطابق با مقررات جاري
بازنگري زماني هاجرايي، دورمي ملاك انگليسي متن
ينسخه اصل - 1يادآوريرده خارج شده، و به دو استاندارد مجزا در ز
IPS-M-EL-143(1) تابلوهاIPS-M-EL-144(1) تابلوها
(0)142دو استاندارد همچنين
ضعيف نيز از رده خارج شدند
استاندارد دو زبانه نسخه بازنگري شده استاندارد ينا - 2يادآوريكميته فني مربوطه انجام و به عنوان و
استانداردهاي صنعت نفت ايران
كريمخان زند، بلوار ايران، تهران، ، معاونت استانداردهاها طرح
1585886851: كدپستي 88810459 - 60: تلفن
021( 88810462: دور نگار standards@nioc.ir: رايانامه
http://ips.mop.ir: وبگاه
هاي مرجع تخصصي استاندارد، كميتهكميته - 1هاي دولتي، خصوصي و تعاوني بخش(صنعت نفت
الزامات -فشار ضعيفبرق قدرت و فرمان
و يمنياستاندارد تمام موارد ا يندر ا.
مناسب يمنيبهداشت و ا يطشرا يبرقرار
سـاخت، نظـارت بـر ي،طراح ـ يبـرا كه از اين پس در ايـن اسـتاندارد، بـا
،گـاز ،نفـت يعاستاندارد، در صنا ين
يافتهر مورد در زمان در يالزامات خاص برا
.ها ارائه خواهد شد
. اسـت شده داده ارجاع ها به آن يالزام
آن يبعـد يدنظرهاي ـو تجد هـا هي است، شده داده ارجاع ها انتشار به آن
.است
2-1 ANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2)
numbers, Acronyms, and contact designations
2-2 API RP 505, Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
installations at petroleum facilities classified as class 1, zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2
2-3 IEC 60038 , IEC Standard Voltages
تـدوين IEC 60038:2009 استاندارد، با استفاده از اسـتاندارد
April 2019
IPS
1
برق قدرت و فرمان براي تابلوهاي استاندارد كالا و تجهيزات
فني
. است يضرور اين استاندارد هاي بخش يدر تمام يمني
برقرار يتمسئول ي،موارد يندر صورت مواجهه با چن. درج نشده است
.استاندارد است ينآن برعهده كاربر ا
هدف و دامنه كاربرد
بـرا يـاز مورد ن يفنحداقل الزامات تعيين ،استاندارد ينكه از اين پس در ايـن اسـتاندارد، بـا است ACو فرمان يففشار ضع يو آزمون تابلوها
.شود بدان اشاره مي“ تابلو”يا “ تابلوي فشار ضعيف
ينذكر شده در ا ياتيعمل يطبا توجه به شرا يففشار ضع .نصب خواهند شد يراندر ا
الزامات خاص برا. شده است يدق ياستاندارد اطلاعات و الزامات عموم .ارائه خواهد شد يدسفارش خر
ها ارائه خواهد شدپيوست يگرو د ياستاندارد با نقشه تك خط ين
الزام صورتاستاندارد به نيوجود دارد كه در متن ا . شوند ياستاندارد محسوب م نياز ا يآن ضوابط جزئ
يانتشار ارجاع داده شده باشد، اصلاح خيبا ذكر تار يمرجعانتشار به آن خيكه بدون ذكر تار يدر مورد مراجع. ستين آور استاندارد الزام
آور الزام ارداستاند نيا يبرا يبعد يها هيو اصلاح دنظر
.از مراجع زير براي كاربرد اين استاندارد الزامي است
ANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2) , IEEE Standard electrical power system device function
numbers, Acronyms, and contact designations
Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
installations at petroleum facilities classified as class 1, zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2
IEC Standard Voltages
استاندارد، با استفاده از اسـتاندارد ي، ولتاژها1391سال : 6استاندارد ملي ايران شماره
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
استاندارد كالا و تجهيزات
يمنيموارد ا يترعا -هشدار
درج نشده است يبهداشت
آن برعهده كاربر ا يو اجرا
هدف و دامنه كاربرد 1
ينا يناز تدو هدف 1-1و آزمون تابلوها يفيساخت، كنترل ك
تابلوي فشار ضعيف”عنوان
فشار ضع يتابلوها ينا 1-2در ا يميو پتروش پالايشي
استاندارد اطلاعات و الزامات عموم يندر ا 1-3سفارش خر يااستعلام و
ينا ياز،در صورت ن 1-4
مراجع الزامي 2
يضوابط ريدر مراجع زآن ضوابط جزئ ب،يترت نيبد
مرجع به كه يصورت دراستاندارد الزام نيا يبرا
دنظريتجد نيآخر همواره
از مراجع زير براي كاربرد اين استاندارد الزامي است استفاده
IEEE Standard electrical power system device function
Recommended practice for classification of locations for electrical
installations at petroleum facilities classified as class 1, zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري
2-4 IEC 60051-1, Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their
accessories - Part 1: Definitions and
يمآنـالوگ بـا عملكـرد مسـتق يكـي الكترــمت ــام قس ــترك در تم ــتاندارد مش ــتفاده از اس ــا اس ــا، ب ه
2-5 IEC 60073, Basic and safety principles for man
identification - Coding principles for indicators and actuators
و ينشـانه گـذار -ينماش ـ -نواسـط انسـا IEC 60073:2002 تدوين شده است.
2-6 IEC 60079-1, Explosive atmospheres
enclosures ‘d’
محافظـت :1قسـمت -يا اشتعال مستعد خطرانفجار .تدوين شده است
2-7 IEC 60079-10-1, Explosive atmospheres
gas atmospheres
-منـاطق بنـدي طبقه: 1-10 قسمت -انفجار .تدوين شده است
2-8 IEC 60079-10-2, Explosive
dust atmospheres
-منـاطق يبنـد طبقـه -2-10قسمت -قابل انفجار .تدوين شده است
2-9 IEC 60269-1+AMD1+AMD2
بـا اسـتفاده از ي،الزامات عموم -1قسمت
2-10 IEC 60269-2+AMD1, Low
for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
standardized systems of fuses A to K
2-11 IEC 60269-3+AMD1+AMD2
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar applications)
Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to F
كه يوزهاييف يليالزامات تكم -3قسمت ييهـا نمونه -)شوند يو مشابه استفاده م
IEC 60269تدوين شده است.
April 2019
IPS
2
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their
Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to all parts
الكتر يريگ اندازه يها ، دستگاه1376سال : 4029-1استاندارد ملي ايران شماره ــمت اول ــا قس ــات آنه ــانگر و متعلق ــار: نش ــ يفتع ــررات كل ــمت يو مق ــام قس ــترك در تم مش
.تدوين شده است
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
Coding principles for indicators and actuators
واسـط انسـا يبـرا يمنيو ا يه، اصول اول1390سال : 110استاندارد ملي ايران شماره IEC 60073:2002نشانگرها و كاراندازها، با استفاده از استاندارد يبرا ي
Explosive atmospheres – Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof
مستعد خطرانفجار يها يط، مح1397سال : 5505-1ايران شماره IEC 60079-1:2014 ، با استفاده از استانداردd محفظه ضد شعله
Explosive atmospheres - Part 10-1: Classification of areas
انفجار قابل هاي، محيط1396سال : 5505-10-1استاندارد ملي ايران شماره تدوين شده است IEC 60079-10-1:2015 استاندارد از استفاده با انفجار،
Explosive atmospheres – Part 10-2: Classification of areas
قابل انفجار ي، جوها1394سال : 5505-10-2استاندارد ملي ايران شماره تدوين شده است IEC 60079-10-2:2015 گرد و غبار قابل انفجار، با استفاده از استاندارد
1+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
قسمت -يفولتاژ ضع يوزهاي، ف1392سال : 3109-1استاندارد ملي ايران شماره IEC 60269تدوين شده است.
Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses
for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
standardized systems of fuses A to K
3+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 3: Supplementary requirements
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar applications)
Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to F
-يفولتاژ ضع يوزهاي، ف1390سال : 60269-3استاندارد ملي ايران شماره يخانگ يكاربردها يكه عمدتا برا يوزهاييف( شوند يماهر به كاربرده م
IEC 60269-3:2010، با استفاده از استانداردF تا A يزهايواستاندارد شده ف
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
.شده است
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their
general requirements common to all parts
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريــمت اول ــا قس ــات آنه ــانگر و متعلق نش
IEC 60051-1:1984 تدوين شده است
machine interface, marking and
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريياصول كد گذار -ييشناسا
Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof
ايران شمارهاستاندارد ملي -يادآوريمحفظه ضد شعله يلهبه وس يزاتتجه
1: Classification of areas - Explosive
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريانفجار، قابل گازي هايمحيط
2: Classification of areas – Explosive
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريگرد و غبار قابل انفجار، با استفاده از استاندارد يجوها
Part 1: General requirements
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري IEC 60269-1:2009استاندارد
Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses
for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) - Examples of
Supplementary requirements
for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household or similar applications) -
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريماهر به كاربرده م يرتوسط افراد غ
استاندارد شده ف هاي يستماز س
2-12 IEC 60269-4+AMD1+AMD2
for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices
2-13 IEC 60445+COR1, Basic and safety principles for man
identification - Identification of
و يگـذار نشـانه -ينماش ـ -واسـط انسـان تدوين IEC 60445:2010 با استفاده از استاندارد
2-14 IEC 60529+AMD2+COR1
، با اسـتفاده از )IPكد(ها شده توسط محفظه
2-15 IEC 60688+COR1, Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals
الكتريكي هاي كميت تبديل براي الكتريكي
IEC 60688: 2012+Cor1:2013 تـدوين شـده
2-16 IEC 60947 (All parts), Low
، بـا اسـتفاده از يففرمان فشـار ضـع قطع و وصل و
2-17 IEC 61869-1, Instrument transformers
بـا ي،الزامـات عمـوم -1قسمت -يريگاندازه
2-18 IEC 61869-2, Instrument transformers
transformers
2-19 IEC 61869-3, Instrument transformers
voltage transformers
2-20 IEC 61869-5, Instrument transformers
voltage transformers
2-21 IEC 61439-1, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
-1قسـمت - يفقطـع و وصـل و فرمـان فشـار ضـع
2-22 IEC 61439-6, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
trunking systems (busways)
-6قسـمت -يفقطـع و وصـل و فرمـان فشـار ضـع
April 2019
IPS
3
4+AMD1+AMD2, Low-voltage fuses - Part 4: Supplementary requirements
links for the protection of semiconductor devices
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors
واسـط انسـان يبرا يهو پا يمني، اصول ا1393سال : 9969استاندارد ملي ايران شماره با استفاده از استاندارد يزات،تجه يهاينالها و ترميهاد يهاينالترم -ها
IEC 60529+AMD2+COR1, Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
شده توسط محفظه ين، درجات حفاظت تام1395سال : 2868استاندارد ملي ايران شماره IEC 60529:1989+A1:1999+A2:2013 تدوين شده است.
Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals
الكتريكي گيري اندازه هاي، مبدل1396سال : 15436استاندارد ملي ايران شماره IEC 60688: 2012+Cor1:2013هاي آنالوگ يا ديجيتال، بـا اسـتفاده از اسـتاندارد
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
قطع و وصل و يل، مجموعه وسا4835مجموعه استانداردهاي ملي ايران شماره تدوين شده است IEC 60947 استاندارد مجموعه
Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements
اندازه ي، ترانسفورماتورها1390سال : 61869-1استاندارد ملي ايران شماره IEC 61869-1: 2007 تدوين شده است.
Instrument transformers - Part 2: Additional requirements for current
Instrument transformers - Part 3: Additional requirements for inductive
Instrument transformers - Part 5: Additional requirements for capacitor
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: General rules
قطـع و وصـل و فرمـان فشـار ضـع ي، تابلوهـا 1393سال : 12103-1استاندارد ملي ايران شماره .تدوين شده است IEC 61439-1: 2011 با استفاده از استاندارد
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
قطـع و وصـل و فرمـان فشـار ضـع ي، تابلوهـا 1392سـال : 12103-6استاندارد ملي ايران شماره
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
Part 4: Supplementary requirements
machine interface, marking and
equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريهايهاد ييشناسا -ييشناسا
.شده است
Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري IEC 60529:1989+A1:1999+A2:2013استاندارد
Electrical measuring transducers for converting A.C. and D.C.
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريA.C. و D.C. هاي آنالوگ يا ديجيتال، بـا اسـتفاده از اسـتاندارد به سيگنال
.است
مجموعه استانداردهاي ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريمجموعه هايبرخي قسمت
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري 2007 :1استفاده از استاندارد
Part 2: Additional requirements for current
Part 3: Additional requirements for inductive
Part 5: Additional requirements for capacitor
Part 1: General rules
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريبا استفاده از استاندارد ي،مقررات عموم
voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 6: Busbar
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري
IECتدوين شده است.
2-23 IEC 62052-11+AMD1,
tests and test conditions - Part 11: Metering equipment
ي،الزامـات عمـوم (AC) يسـيته الكتر يـري IEC 62052-11: 2003 تـدوين شـده
2-24 IEC 62053-11+AMD1, Electricity metering equipment (a.c.)
Part 11: Electromechanical meters for activ
قسمت -يژهالزامات و (a.c) يسيتهالكتر يريــتاندارد )2و 1و 0/ ــتفاده از اس ــا اس ، ب
2-25 IEC 62262, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
against external mechanical impacts (IK code)
يكيمحفظه در برابـر ضـربات مكـان يلهحفاظت به وس .تدوين شده است
2-26 IPS-E-EL-100, Engineering and equipment standard for
(industrial and non-industrial)
2-27 IPS-E-GN-100, Engineering standard for units
2-28 IPS-M-EL-161, Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
ANSI C37.2 (ياست كه استانداردها نيبه منزله ا
اشاره آن به فروشنده شنهاديپ در ديبا بالا
ــتانداردها ــيكم ياس ــ ونيس ــ نيب ــرق يالملل ب
April 2019
IPS
4
IEC 61439-6:2012استاندارد، با استفاده از )هايوباس(باس بار
, Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) - General requirements,
Part 11: Metering equipment
يـري گانـدازه يزات، تجه1387سال : 11220-11استاندارد ملي ايران شماره 2003 :11با اسـتفاده از اسـتاندارد يري،اندازه گ يزاتتجه -11قسمت
Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) - Particular requirements
chanical meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1 and 2)
يرياندازه گ يزات، تجه1388سال : 10795-11استاندارد ملي ايران شماره ــريگ ــان ي ــرا يكيالكترومك ــرژ يب ــواكت يان ــا رده( ي /5 يه
.تدوين شده است
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
al mechanical impacts (IK code)
حفاظت به وس ين، درجات تأم1386سال : 9936استاندارد ملي ايران شماره تدوين شده است IEC 62262:2002 ، با استفاده از استاندارد) IKكد( يكيالكتر
Engineering and equipment standard for electrical system design
Engineering standard for units
Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
ANSI C37.2 انندم. (شود نييتع IECاز ريغ يكه استانداردهاي
.باشد ي
بالا در شده اشاره مراجع ياستانداردها اي و استاندارد نيا با رت
اصطلاحات و تعاريف
ــطلاحات و ــتاندارد اص ــن اس ــاردر اي ــده در فيتع ــان ش ــتانداردها بي اسIEC 60050-441 به كار مي رود.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
باس بار يمجرا هاي يستمس
General requirements,
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوري -آزمون يطها و شرا آزمون .است
Particular requirements -
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريــزاتتجه -11 ــدازه ي گان
IEC 62053-11:2003 تدوين شده است
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
استاندارد ملي ايران شماره -يادآوريالكتر يزاتتجه يبرا يرونيب
electrical system design
Material and equipment standard for general electrical items
كه استانداردهاي يصورت در -1يادآوري يمورد قبول م IEC معادل
رتيمغا هرگونه -2يادآوري .شود
اصطلاحات و تعاريف 3
ــطلاحات و ــتاندارد اص ــن اس در ايIEC 60050-151 441و
company
ايـران، گـاز ملـي شركت ايران، نفت .شود مي اتلاق نفتي
purchaser
باشـد و يـا مـي “شـركت ”كه اين استاندارد بخشـي از مـدارك سـفارش خريـد مسـتقيم آن
vendor and supplier
.نمايد مي تامين را صنعت
contractor
.است شده پذيرفته
inspector
ساخت ،يبازرس يبرا كارفرما توسط
shall
April 2019
IPS
5
نفت ملي شركت مثل نفت، وزارت به وابسته يا و اصلينفتي هاي فرآورده پخش و پالايش ملي شركت و پتروشيمي
كه اين استاندارد بخشـي از مـدارك سـفارش خريـد مسـتقيم آن .كه اين استاندارد بخشي از مدارك قرارداد آن است
كننده
صنعت لزوم مورد كالاهاي و تجهيزات كه شود مي گفته شخصي
مناقصه براي پيشنهادش كه شود مي گفته شركتي يا
توسط كتبا كه شود يم اتلاق اي موسسه ياگروه /فرد به بازرس .باشد شده ي
.شود مي استفاده است، اجباري آن
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
3 -1
شركت
اصلي هاي شركت از يكي بهپتروشيمي صنايع ملي شركت
3 -2
خريدار
كه اين استاندارد بخشـي از مـدارك سـفارش خريـد مسـتقيم آن “شركتي” يعنيكه اين استاندارد بخشي از مدارك قرارداد آن است “پيمانكاري”
3 -3
كننده مينأت و فروشنده
شخصي يا و موسسه به
3 -4
پيمانكار
يا و موسسه شخص، به
3 -5
بازرس
بازرس استاندارد نيا دريمعرف تجهيزات نصب و
3 -6
بايد
آن انجام كه كاري براي
should
will
.يردگ يفروشنده مورد استفاده قرار م
may
يدارا كـه بـرق يفرع ـ يهـا پسـت
سربسـته، كـه يهـا طيمح ـ ريبرق و سااسـتاندارد ني ـا. گردنـد ياحـداث م ـ
.كند يداخل ساختمان مناسب باشند مشخص م
در خارج از ساختمان نصـب شـوند، در داده بـرگ پيوسـت الـف قدرت و يتابلو يبرا يليالزامات تكم
.رديمورد استفاده قرار گ
تجـاوز نخواهـد كـرد و C 40° هواي محـيط از
دماي هواي محيط آن دمـايي اسـت كـه در مجـاورت تجهيـز در صورتي كه بدون محفظه باشد، و يا در مجاورت محفظه در صـورتي كـه داراي محفظـه باشـد، مـلاك عمـل
April 2019
IPS
6
.رود مي بكار شود، مي توصيه آن انجام ضرورت
فروشنده مورد استفاده قرار م ياكننده ينتأم ،يمانكاربه پ "شركت" نظارتي در رابطه با اقدام
.رود مي بكار باشد، مي اختياري آن
پسـت داخـل در معمولا نجايا در شده اشاره فيضع فشار .شود يم نصب است، هي
برق و سا يفرع يها پست دهد،ياجازه م يطيمح يبند تا آنجا كه كلاساحـداث م ـ مـن يا يهـا در آن نصب خواهند شـد در محوطـه
داخل ساختمان مناسب باشند مشخص م يها در محل منيا يها محوطه ي
در خارج از ساختمان نصـب شـوند، در داده بـرگ پيوسـت الـف فيفشار ضع يكه تابلوهاالزامات تكم”كه در پيوست ب ياستاندارد به اضافه مشخصات
مورد استفاده قرار گ ديآورده شده است، با“ يرونيمحيط ب
هواي محـيط از يكه در داده برگ ارائه شده است، دما . نخواهد شد شتريب+ C 35° ساعته از 24متوسط آن در يك دوره
دماي هواي محيط آن دمـايي اسـت كـه در مجـاورت تجهيـز در . است -C 5° پايين دماي هواي محيطصورتي كه بدون محفظه باشد، و يا در مجاورت محفظه در صـورتي كـه داراي محفظـه باشـد، مـلاك عمـل
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
3 -7
توصيه
ضرورت كه كاري براي
3 -8
ترجيح
در رابطه با اقدام معمولا
3 -9
است ممكن
آن انجام كه كاري براي
ياتيعمل طيشرا 4
قدرت يتابلوها 4-1يتهو دستگاه اي هواكش
تا آنجا كه كلاس 4-2در آن نصب خواهند شـد در محوطـه فيفشار ضع يتابلوها
يرا كه برا يهائ دستگاه
كه تابلوها يدر موارد 4-3 نيا. خواهد شد نييتع
محيط ب يففرمان فشار ضع
كه در داده برگ ارائه شده است، دما يبه جز موارد 4-4متوسط آن در يك دوره
پايين دماي هواي محيط حدصورتي كه بدون محفظه باشد، و يا در مجاورت محفظه در صـورتي كـه داراي محفظـه باشـد، مـلاك عمـل
.خواهد بود
كـه در داده ينخواهد بود، به جز موارد
الكتريـك و اثـرات خنـك شوند، در نظر گرفتن كاهش مقاومـت دي شوند بايد مطابق توافـق ميـان كارفرمـا و سـازنده
.تجاوز نخواهد كرد
تواند رطوبت نسبي بالاتر از مقـادير مشـخص شـده در .اين استاندارد را داشته باشد و يا حاوي مقادير غير متعارفي از غبار، اسيدها، گازهاي خورنده و غيره باشد
عملياتي و كاربردي با آنچه در اين استاندارد ذكر شده، متفاوت باشد، كـاربر بايـد وجـوه تمـايز از .شرايط استاندارد را ذكر نموده و در خصوص مناسب بودن تجهيز تحت اين شرايط با كارفرما مشاوره نمايد
ص شـده در بنـدهاي در زماني كه شرايط حمل و نقل و نگهداري مانند دما و رطوبت، از مقادير مشـخ بجـز در مـوارد تعيـين .متمايز باشند، بايد يك توافق ويژه ميان سازنده و كارفرما منعقد گـردد
، و تـا +C 55° و -C 25° بـين : شـوند
برگ مشخص شده است، كل مجموعه و ادوات نصب شده در داخل آن بايد IEC اگرچه هوا مملو . مناسب باشند .نفتي وجود دارد، باشد
شـده بـه نيـي تع طيباشند و بايد تحت شـرا
:برداري باشد هاي ولتاژ و فركانس زير قابل بهره
IEC 62262 باشد.
April 2019
IPS
7
نخواهد بود، به جز موارد شتريمتر ب 2000ها از جهت نصب دستگاه ايارتفاع از سطح در
شوند، در نظر گرفتن كاهش مقاومـت دي براي تجهيزاتي كه در ارتفاع بالاتري استفاده ميشوند بايد مطابق توافـق ميـان كارفرمـا و سـازنده تجهيزات الكتريكي كه تحت اين شرايط، عملياتي مي
تجاوز نخواهد كرد+ C 40° در بيشينه دماي% 50هوا از يرطوبت نسب
تواند رطوبت نسبي بالاتر از مقـادير مشـخص شـده در اتمسفري كه تجهيز در آن نصب شده است مياين استاندارد را داشته باشد و يا حاوي مقادير غير متعارفي از غبار، اسيدها، گازهاي خورنده و غيره باشد
عملياتي و كاربردي با آنچه در اين استاندارد ذكر شده، متفاوت باشد، كـاربر بايـد وجـوه تمـايز از شرايط استاندارد را ذكر نموده و در خصوص مناسب بودن تجهيز تحت اين شرايط با كارفرما مشاوره نمايد
در زماني كه شرايط حمل و نقل و نگهداري مانند دما و رطوبت، از مقادير مشـخ متمايز باشند، بايد يك توافق ويژه ميان سازنده و كارفرما منعقد گـردد
شـوند فتـه شده، بازه دمايي زير بايد حين حمل و نقل و نگهداري در نظر گر .تجاوز ننمايد h 24 براي مدت كوتاهي كه از
برگ مشخص شده است، كل مجموعه و ادوات نصب شده در داخل آن بايد بجز در مواردي كه در داده IEC 60947-1مطابق با استاندارد 3براي استفاده در محيط با آلودگي درجه
نفتي وجود دارد، باشدصنايع هاي يا سولفور كه در محيط
باشند و بايد تحت شـرا دهيخسارت د ديذكر شده قبل از كاربرد نبا.
هاي ولتاژ و فركانس زير قابل بهره تجهيز بايد بدون داشتن اثر مخرب با رواداري
% :10±
% :10% / +15-
62262مطابق با استاندارد IK08تحمل ضربه مكانيكي بايد حداقل
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ارتفاع از سطح در 4-5 .خواهد شد برگ ارائه
براي تجهيزاتي كه در ارتفاع بالاتري استفاده مي :يادآوريتجهيزات الكتريكي كه تحت اين شرايط، عملياتي مي. شدن هوا ضروري است .طراحي و استفاده شوند
رطوبت نسبدرجه 4-6
اتمسفري كه تجهيز در آن نصب شده است مي 4-7اين استاندارد را داشته باشد و يا حاوي مقادير غير متعارفي از غبار، اسيدها، گازهاي خورنده و غيره باشد
عملياتي و كاربردي با آنچه در اين استاندارد ذكر شده، متفاوت باشد، كـاربر بايـد وجـوه تمـايز از شرايط اگرشرايط استاندارد را ذكر نموده و در خصوص مناسب بودن تجهيز تحت اين شرايط با كارفرما مشاوره نمايد
در زماني كه شرايط حمل و نقل و نگهداري مانند دما و رطوبت، از مقادير مشـخ 4-8متمايز باشند، بايد يك توافق ويژه ميان سازنده و كارفرما منعقد گـردد 7-4تا 4-1
شده، بازه دمايي زير بايد حين حمل و نقل و نگهداري در نظر گر°C 70 +براي مدت كوتاهي كه از
بجز در مواردي كه در داده 4-9براي استفاده در محيط با آلودگي درجه
يا سولفور كه در محيط/از گردوغبار، املاح و
ذكر شده قبل از كاربرد نبا طيدر شرا هادستگاه.صورت عادي كار كنند
تجهيز بايد بدون داشتن اثر مخرب با رواداري 4-10
: %ولتاژ تغذيه متناوب -
±5: %فركانس -
: %تغذيه مستقيمولتاژ -
تحمل ضربه مكانيكي بايد حداقل 4-11
در . باشـد مـي IPS-E-GN-100، منطبق با اسـتاندارد آورده شـود و جلـوي آن SIصورتي كه بيان مقادير در واحد ديگري ضروري باشد، بايد ابتـدا معـادل آن بـه
خواهـد IEC 60038 بر اساس اسـتاندارد
متصل نيبه زم مايباشد كه نول آن مستق
230/ V400 خواهد نمود هيتغذ.
باشد، و مي ميحفاظت و تنظ ،يري .باشد تك فاز مي
نه،يدو ش نياتصال ب ديكل ،يورود در اي ـ/ ومشخص شـده استاندارد ن
قدرت رابـط يهاديكل. در حالت عادي بسته باشند يدهاي ـاز كل يك ـيكـه يباز باشند، در صورت باز بودن زمان
و انتخاب خواهد نييشركت تع نده ـ يطـرح حفـاظت نيو قفـل متقابـل ب
. گنجانده شود ستميس نيادر دي
. دهـد يرا نشـان م فيفشار ضـع ي ـ آنهـا در صـورت لـزوم نيجداول و نقشه اتصـال مشـترك ب
1- Motor Control Center (MCC)
April 2019
IPS
8
، منطبق با اسـتاندارد )SI(اين استاندارد، برمبناي سامانه بين المللي واحدها صورتي كه بيان مقادير در واحد ديگري ضروري باشد، بايد ابتـدا معـادل آن بـه
.داخل پرانتز واحد مورد نظر درج شود
بر اساس اسـتاندارد رانيا يمينفت، گاز و پتروش عيدر صنا يسطوح ولتاژ انتخاب
باشد كه نول آن مستق يم V230/ V400 معمولا فيفشار ضع ستم
V 230ترانسفورماتور اي فياز مولد ولتاژ فشار ضع ف
يگ اندازهقطع و وصل، كنترل، يبرا زاتيشامل تجه فتك فاز مي V 230سه فاز و V 400 يكيالكتر زاتيكنترل تجه
ديكل ،1مركز كنترل موتور اي/انداز موتور و شامل راه فنيكه در ا باشد يم يو لوازم جانب وزيف چيو سو يخروج
.نشان داده شده است
در حالت عادي بسته باشند ديباشد با يكياز شياگر ب ،يقدرت ورودباز باشند، در صورت باز بودن زمان ايعادي بسته اتيدر عمل توانند
ندهينما ارابط ر ديكار كل قهيطر .بطور خودكار بسته شودطـرح حفـاظت . در داده برگ ذكـر خواهـد شـد ايو يكرد كه در نقشه مدار تك خط
يقدرت بالادست با يدهايبا كل نهيدو ش نيو رابط ب ي
يتابلوها ياصل لياستاندارد فقط وسا نيذكر شده درا ـ ،يكش ميمدار كنترل، نقشه س جداول و نقشه اتصـال مشـترك ب
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
واحدها 5
اين استاندارد، برمبناي سامانه بين المللي واحدها صورتي كه بيان مقادير در واحد ديگري ضروري باشد، بايد ابتـدا معـادل آن بـه
داخل پرانتز واحد مورد نظر درج شود
كاربرد 6
سطوح ولتاژ انتخاب 1- 6 .بود
ستميسطح ولتاژ س 2- 6 .شده است
فيتابلو فشار ضع 3- 6
فيتابلو فشار ضع 4- 6كنترل تجه يدر اصل برا
فيتابلو فشار ضع 5- 6خروج يها مصرف كنندهنشان داده شده است ينقشه تك خط
قدرت ورود يهاديكل 6- 6توانند يم نهيدو ش نيب
بطور خودكار بسته شود ديباز شود، با يورودكرد كه در نقشه مدار تك خط
يقدرت ورود يدهايكل
يمدار تك خط 7- 6مدار كنترل، نقشه س كيشمات ستميس .خواهد شد وستيپ
IEC نصـب در يباشـد و بايـد بـرا
چنـد ياسـكلت فلـز يو قابل نصب روي كف باشـد و دارا ايـد مطـابق بـا هـاي تـابلو ب ساير قسمت
يجلو تـابلو قابـل دسترس ـ سمتاز ق
شـده ميجداگانه تقس يها در قسمتو 3b/4bطبق فـرم دي، با)يرفلزيغ
.شده است، باشد
:است ريبه شرح ز
را فـراهم گريكـد يفعـال از يهـا تمـام قسـمت
يها يمربوط به هاد يها ناليفعال و نيز ترم )باشد يمدنظر نم
را فـراهم گريكـد يفعـال از يهـا تمـام قسـمت
هـاي فعـال و را از سـاير قسـمت باشـد ، هاي بيروني كه جزئي از يك قسمت فعـال هسـتند را از سـاير قسـمتهاي فعـال
.هاي بيروني از يكديگر نيست
.فعال قرار دارند يها باشد كه قسمت
بـا درجـه دي ـكه در داده برگ گفته شده، بدنه مناسب نصـب داخـل سـاختمان با جداكننـده و . از بدنه باشـد يبدون استفاده از كف اتاق به عنوان قسمتIP 2X مقـدار . (باشد IP يتـابلو يبـرا
April 2019
IPS
9
IEC 61439-1 و براسـاس يا از نوع چند محفظه ديمجموعه تابلوها با
.داخل ساختمان مناسب باشد
و قابل نصب روي كف باشـد و دارا ستايخود ا ،ياز نوع فلز ديمحفظه تابلو باساير قسمت. ساخته شده باشد mm 2 حداقل يبوده كه با ورق فولاد
از ق ديقطعات دستگاه با .ضخامت قيد شده در گواهينامه آزمون نوعي باشد
در قسمت يدر داخل تابلو نصب شده و به طور مناسب ديبا زاتغ اي يفلز(ها مهاركننده ايها و جداكننده لهيبه وس يشده است، باشد فيتعر IEC 61439-2كه در استاندارد ) مطابق نظر مالك
به شرح ز IEC 61439-2از استــاندارد 4a و 3b يهـــا فرم
تمـام قسـمت يفعال و جداساز يها از قسمت ها نهيش
فعال و نيز ترم يها از قسمت يرونيب يها يمربوط به هاد مدنظر نم گريكدياز ها ناليترم يجداساز. (اند شده يجداساز
تمـام قسـمت يفعال و جداسـاز يها از قسمت ها نهي
باشـد يفعال م يها از قسمت يكه جزئ يرونيب يها يهاي بيروني كه جزئي از يك قسمت فعـال هسـتند را از سـاير قسـمتهاي فعـال هادي
هاي بيروني از يكديگر نيست به جداسازي هادي ازيني. كند هاي آنها جدا مي
باشد كه قسمت يا در همان محفظه تواند يم يرونيب يها يمربوط به هاد
كه در داده برگ گفته شده، بدنه مناسب نصـب داخـل سـاختمان با يبه جز در مواردبدون استفاده از كف اتاق به عنوان قسمت IEC 60529براساس
2Xحداقل درجه حفاظت ديعملياتي با يها قسمت
).ساختمان در پيوست ب نشان داده شده است رون
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
الزامات عمومي 7
بدنه 7-1
مجموعه تابلوها با 7-1-1داخل ساختمان مناسب باشد
محفظه تابلو با 7-1-2بوده كه با ورق فولاد يا محفظه
ضخامت قيد شده در گواهينامه آزمون نوعي باشد .دنباش
زاتيتمام تجه 7-1-3يداخل يجداساز. دنباش
مطابق نظر مالك( 4a اي
فرم فيتعـــار 7-1-4
ش يجداساز :3bفرم - .كند يم
يها ناليترم نيهمچنجداساز ها نهياز ش يرونيب
يش يجداساز: 4aفرم - .كند مي
يهاد ناليترم همچنينهادي. كند ها جدا مي شينههاي آنها جدا مي و ترمينال ها شينه
مربوط به هاد يها ناليترم
به جز در موارد 7-1-5براساس IP41حفاظت
قسمت نيب يها مهاركننده ايرونيمناسب نصب در ب
و درداده برگ نشان داده شده باشددر ديو ادوات نمايشگر با ياتيعمل ي
سوراخ نمودن ايو دنيبه بر اجيكه احت .طرف را داشته باشند
ني ـا. در نظـر گرفتـه شـود نـده يجهت توسعه آ وجود تابلو بهبرق در آن بخش از ي
.و قطعات ثابت تجهيزات باشد
شـده درصد اندازه واحدهاي خروجي باشد كه حداقل سه تـا از آنهـا نصـب از 20% مطابق نقشـه تـك خطـي بايـد بـه ميـزان
اسـتارتر /انـدازه فيـدر راي تأمين شود كه حداقل يـك واحـد از ه ـ
و قـرار دادن اسـتارترها و ياسـكلت عمـود .تابلو اجتناب شود
هـايي بـا رطوبـت بـالا و تغييـرات دمـايي وسـيع تـا از ) يا گرمايش داخلي، مجاري تخليه و غيـره
در . رعايـت شـده باشـد مـان اگر چه درجه حفاظت در همان ز ني ـا 6-9با بنـد ديشده باشد، آنها با
. شـده و از داخـل و خـارج رنـگ شـود يزي ـآم ضخامت رنگ. استر باشد ي
سـازندگان يهادبوده و دوران خشك شدن رنگ و آماده شدن آن بر اساس اسـتاندار بـالا حاتيسازنده با توض يزيآم اگر استاندارد رنگ
از كـف اتـاق خواهنـد اياز كانال و در صـورتي كـه . شـود در نظر گرفته شـود، از قسـمت بـالا وارد تـابلو مـي
اتصـال بـاس داكـت و تبايسـت فلـنج مناسـب جه ـ
April 2019
IPS
10
درداده برگ نشان داده شده باشد ديبر اساس استاندارد سازندگان بوده و با ديرتفاع و عمق بدنه بايها رهيها و دستگ ها و دكمه چيسو. باشد cm 220بايد cm 180 نباشد، نصب شوند شتريب.
كه احت نيمربوطه بدون ا يها يكش ميها و س نهيهمراه با شطرف را داشته باشند توسعه از دو تيقابل ديبا ،مختلف بدنه باشد
جهت توسعه آ ديدر هر قسمت از تابلو با يمحفظه خاليقطع نيها كمتر كردن آن زيباشند كه در هنگام تجه
و قطعات ثابت تجهيزات باشدهاي مناسب خالي بايد شامل اتصال به شينه و نگهدارنده
درصد اندازه واحدهاي خروجي باشد كه حداقل سه تـا از آنهـا نصـب 10هاي خالي بايد مطابق نقشـه تـك خطـي بايـد بـه ميـزان . ها علاوه بر تعداد واحدهاي يدكي است
اي تأمين شود كه حداقل يـك واحـد از ه ـ واحدهاي يدكي با تجهيزات كامل به گونه .)هاي اتصال به استثناء ورودي و شينه
اسـكلت عمـود يطراح. طبيعي باشد ديقدرت با يبدنه تابلوتابلو اجتناب شود يبالا يها باشد كه از جمع شدن حرارت در قسمت
هـايي بـا رطوبـت بـالا و تغييـرات دمـايي وسـيع ها در محيط دروني يا بيروني، كه در مكانيا گرمايش داخلي، مجاري تخليه و غيـره /تهويه و(چينش مناسب باشند شوند، بايد داراي
اگر چه درجه حفاظت در همان ز. ميعانات مخرب درون محفظه جلوگيري شودشده باشد، آنها با نييضد رطوبت در داده برگ پيوست الف تع يها
.استاندارد مطابقت داشته باشند
ـ به شـده و از داخـل و خـارج رنـگ شـود و فسـفات زي ـتم ،يزدائ ـ يطور كامـل چربيپل نيو رز يبراساس اپوكس كيبا پوشش پودر الكترواستات
بوده و دوران خشك شدن رنگ و آماده شدن آن بر اساس اسـتاندار 80اگر استاندارد رنگ. شركت خواهد بود ندهيرنگ بدنه با انتخاب نما
.شركت گرفته شود ندهيموافقت نما دي
از كانال و شوند يقدرت م يكه وارد تابلو يو خروج يورود يدر نظر گرفته شـود، از قسـمت بـالا وارد تـابلو مـي ياگر باس داكت جهت ورود
بايسـت فلـنج مناسـب جه ـ اند، سازنده مـي ها از نوع باس داكت تعيين شده . يق شده مناسب را تا محل فلنج فراهم آورد
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
رتفاع و عمق بدنه باا 7-1-6بايد بدنه حداكثر ارتفاع
cmازارتفاع مناسب كه
همراه با شبدنه تابلو 7-1-7مختلف بدنه باشد يها قسمت
محفظه خال كيحداقل 7-1-8باشند كه در هنگام تجه يطور ديها با محفظه
.ديآ
خالي بايد شامل اتصال به شينه و نگهدارنده محفظه
هاي خالي بايد محفظه تعدادها علاوه بر تعداد واحدهاي يدكي است محفظه نيا. است
واحدهاي يدكي با تجهيزات كامل به گونهبه استثناء ورودي و شينه. (موجود باشد
بدنه تابلوسازي خنك 7-1-9باشد كه از جمع شدن حرارت در قسمت يطور ديبا درهايف
ها در محيط دروني يا بيروني، كه در مكان محفظه 7-1-10شوند، بايد داراي استفاده مي
ميعانات مخرب درون محفظه جلوگيري شودها كه گرم كننده يمواقع
استاندارد مطابقت داشته باشند
ديبدنه تابلو با 7-1-11با پوشش پودر الكترواستات ديبا يزيآم رنگ
µm 80 تا µm 60 ديبارنگ بدنه با انتخاب نما. پودر باشد
يداشته باشد، با رتيمغا
يها تمام كابل 7-1-12اگر باس داكت جهت ورود. بود
ها از نوع باس داكت تعيين شده ورودييق شده مناسب را تا محل فلنج فراهم آوردهاي مسي عا شينه
. لازم در نظـر گرفتـه شـود داتي ـدر داخـل محفظـه تـابلو تمه يمناسب يها يورود ديبدنه تابلو با يبـرا . شـوند يآب بنـد دي ـهـا با كامل كابل
نيفروشـندگان تـأم گـر يهـا توسـط د .باشد يسيرمغناطي
قابل انعطاف بـا سـطح نيزم يها م .تابلو وصل خواهند شد
دي ـنصـب تـابلو، با يها و دستورالعمل
بـالا و بـر اسـاس اسـتاندارد تيهـدا
درجـه حـرارت از شيو بـدون افـزا در دو طرف تابلو ندهيباشد كه توسعه تابلو در آ
،كندكننده آتش و ضد رطوبت پوشش داده شده و با رنگقابـل ياحتمـال يجهـت بازرس ـ دي ـمحكم شده باشند كه از شل شدن
هـا نهيها، اتصـالات ش ـ برگ دادهو مشخص كردن آن در
يقيپوشـش عـا يرنگ ـ يكدبند اينشان داده شده باشد، رنگ بي ـترت. نـول در نظـر گرفتـه شـود
.به راست، است پ
سـطح مقطـع و . باشـد كسـان ياز نظر سطح مقطع در سرتاسر طول تابلو .در داده برگ مشخص شود
April 2019
IPS
11
در داخـل محفظـه تـابلو تمه ديجهت مهار و نگه داشتن كابلها با نيدر قسمت پائ. از كف تابلو بالاتر باشد cm 40 ديكابل با
كامل كابل بها پس از نص يورود نيا. جهت عبور كابل در نظر گرفته شودهـا توسـط د گلند كابـل (شود ياز گلند كابل استفاده م يو خروج
يغ ديتك رشته صفحه گلند با يها در صورت استفاده از كابل
ميها در داخل بدنه جدا شده و توسط س و زره كابل يتابلو وصل خواهند شد نيزم نهيشزره كابل محكم شده و به
.بدنه نصب شود يبر رو ديحمل و نقل با
و دستورالعمل ونيفونداس ينصب تابلو بر رو يها و مهره چيمشخصات فني پ .توسط فروشنده ارائه شود
هـدا تي ـشده و بـا قابل دهياز فلز مس سخت كش ديها با .ساخته شوند
و بـدون افـزا طيدرجه حرارت مح ـ نيدر بالاتر ينام انيجر يبراباشد كه توسعه تابلو در آ يطور ديها با نهيش يطراح. شوند يشده، طراح
كندكننده آتش و ضد رطوبت پوشش داده شده و با رنگ قيبا عا ديبا نيقدرت و نول زمي ـهـا با نهيمربوط به محل اتصالات ش قيعا. و مشخص شده باشند
يبوده و به نحو و خوردگي ضد زنگ ديها با نهياتصالات شو مشخص كردن آن در يدر صورت درخواست متقاض
.شده باشند ينقره پوشش و آبكار
نشان داده شده باشد، رنگ يگريد زيبه جز آنكه در داده برگ چنـول در نظـر گرفتـه شـود نهيش يبرا يفازها و رنگ مشك نهيجهت ش يقرمز، زرد و آب
پو از چ نياز بالا به پاي ميچنانچه در مقابل تابلو قرار گرفته باش
از نظر سطح مقطع در سرتاسر طول تابلو ديبا ياصل يدر داده برگ مشخص شود ديبا ياصل يافق يها نهيش
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
جهت مهار و نگه داشتن كابلها با 7-1-13كابل با يها نگهدارنده
جهت عبور كابل در نظر گرفته شودو خروج يورود يها كابل
در صورت استفاده از كابل). خواهد شد
يپوشش سرب 7-1-14زره كابل محكم شده و به مقطع مناسب به
حمل و نقل با يها حلقه 7-1-15
مشخصات فني پ 7-1-16توسط فروشنده ارائه شود
ها نهيش 7-2
ها با نهيجنس ش 7-2-1IEC 61439-1 ساخته شوند
برا ديها با نهيش 7-2-2شده، طراح نييمقدار تع .باشد ريامكان پذ
قدرت و نول زم يها نهيش 7-2-3و مشخص شده باشند يكدبند
اتصالات ش. برداشتن باشنددر صورت درخواست متقاض. شود يريها جلوگ آننقره پوشش و آبكاربا فلز ديبا
به جز آنكه در داده برگ چ 7-2-4قرمز، زرد و آب ديها با نهيش
چنانچه در مقابل تابلو قرار گرفته باش يبند رنگ
يافق يها نهيش 7-2-5ش يدائم انيجر تيظرف
ينـام اني ـبوده و جر كساني نهياز نظر سطح مقطع در سرتاسر طول ش يزات ـيوصل است بعلاوه بـار تجه نه
از حـداكثر يناش ـ يو آثـار حرارت ـ قابـل تحمـل اتصـال كوتـاه اني ـجر .باشد مترآمپر موثر متقارن ك
در ديبا زين يعمود يها نهيش. در داخل محفظه جداگانه قرار داشته باشند. فعـال هـر سـتون از اسـتارترها نصـب شـوند
ري ـتمـاس غ ،هادي ـكل ايو ارترآوردن است
كي ـباشند كه يبه گونه ا ديها با نهنمود منياز مدار خارج و ا يراتيتعم
نـول نهيش ـ. شده باشد قيعا نيزم يبـرا ) يا و مهـره چياتصـال پ ـ كي ـنـول نهيش ـ ينام انيجر تيظرف. شود
در تمـام دي ـبا هيثان كي يبرا نياتصال كوتاه زم لديمناسب جهت اتصال ش ـ يها نال
ني ـو مهره مجهز باشد تا بتـوان ا چ
.در نظر گرفته شود
.باشد يراه نيو بدون اتصال ب وسته
ميحداقل سطح مقطع س. كندسوز باشدmm گنال،يكنترل و س
.باشد 5/1 2
April 2019
IPS
12
از نظر سطح مقطع در سرتاسر طول ش ديبا ياصل يعمودنهيكه به همان ش يهاي يخروج يبار نام تيبا حداكثر مجموع ظرف
.باشد ينصب خواهند شد، مساو يخال يها در محفظه
يس ـيمغناط يروي ـتحمل ن تيقابل ديبا يو عمود يجر. را داشـته باشـند هيثان كيحداقل يشده برا نيي
آمپر موثر متقارن ك لويك 50از ديدر داده برگ ارائه شود و نبا
در داخل محفظه جداگانه قرار داشته باشند ديبا ياصل يفعـال هـر سـتون از اسـتارترها نصـب شـوند يهـا در پشت قسمت توانند يداخل محفظه جداگانه باشند و م
آوردن است رونيقرار گرفته باشند كه در حالت ب يطور .باشد رممكنيدار غ برق يها قسمت
نهيش شيها موجود است، آرا نهيقدرت رابط ش ديكه كلتعم يو متعلقات و اتصالات آن را بتوان جهت انجام كارها
.باشد يدار و در حال كار م برق نهيش گر
ستمياز سگسترده شده و بايد در تمام طول تابلو دي ـ: مثـال يبـرا (جـدا كـردن لهيوس. ها شود يوارد محفظه همه ورود
شود هيتعب ديبا يشيجهت مصارف آزما هينول از منبع تغذ .فازها باشد نهيش ينام ان
اتصال كوتاه زم انيحداكثر جر تيبا ظرف نيجداگانه زمناليبا ترم ياتصال به تعداد كاف يها محل. تابلو ادامه داشته باشد
چيپ اي ناسببا اتصالات م ديبا نيزم نهيش. فراهم شود .وصل كرد نيزم يتابلو به هاد
در نظر گرفته شود IPS-E-EL-100بايد مطابق با استاندارد نيزم ي
يگذار ها و علامت نالي
وستهيپ ديبا گريد ناليبه ترم ينالياز ترم يداخل يها ي
كندسوز باشد يس يو يبا پوشش پ يمس يا رشته مياز س دmm ديبا) ولتاژ/انيترانسفورماتور جر
كنترل و س ميس يو برا 5/2 2
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
عمود يها نهيش 7-2-6با حداكثر مجموع ظرف ديآن با
در محفظه ندهيكه در آ
يافق يها نهيش 7-2-7يياتصال كوتاه تع انيجردر داده برگ ارائه شود و نبا ديها با نهيش
يافق يها نهيش 7-2-8داخل محفظه جداگانه باشند و م
ديبا يعمود يها نهيشقسمتمترقبه انگشت با
كه كل يدر جاهاي 7-2-9و متعلقات و اتصالات آن را بتوان جهت انجام كارها نهيقسمت كامل ش
گريكه قسمت د يدر حال
دينول با نهيش 7-2-10وارد محفظه همه ورود ديبا
نول از منبع تغذ نهيش يجداسازانيجر 50% حداقل ديبا
جداگانه زم نهيش كي 7-2-11تابلو ادامه داشته باشد ريطول مس
فراهم شود ديها با زره كابل اي/ وتابلو به هاد يرا از دو انتها نهيش
يمس ميمقطع س سطح
يترم ،يكش ميس 7-3
يكش ميتمام س 1- 7-3
ديبا يكش ميس 2- 7-3ترانسفورماتور جر(حفاظت يبرا
ـ حـداقل ،يحفـاظت زي ـتجه نيتا اولاتصال در سـمت بـاس بـار نيا. مهار گردد
يكيحفاظت مكان لهيوس ايشود، غلاف
مربوطـه در بيشـينه دمـاي ليمـداوم وسـا متناسـب شـده ،شـود يقطع كننده محـدود م ـ
IEC 61439-1 باشد.
از ديو به داخل تابلو ارتباط دارند باقابل انعطاف پوشش يس يو ينوار پ
محكم و مهار يطور ديبا يكش ميدو سر دسته س
تـابلو يابط به شاس ـر يهاد ميس له
حك ميس يكه رو يهاي دائم شده و با شمارهبـا دي ـهـا با ميشـماره س ـ . كابل به صـورت غـلاف سـوار شـده باشـند
اتصـال از و شـوند متصـل اي گيـره ترانسفورماتورهاي هيمدار ثانو يبرا
گـذاري شـده و ثابـت علامـت يدائم ـ
نقطـه كي ـدر شـتر يب ميجهت اتصال س
يتـابلو كـه عملكـرد مشـترك يدرها
April 2019
IPS
13
تا اول ـ ياز باس بار اصل ميگرفتن انشعاب به صورت اتصال مستقmm
مهار گردد يمربع منظور شده و به نحو مناسب 4 2 .باشد يا به صورت كابلشو حلقه
شود، غلاف يمانع عبور داده م ايو ياز صفحه فلز يكش ميكه س .در نظر گرفت
مـداوم وسـا انيجر نيشتريبه ب ديتابلو با يداخل يها يقطع كننده محـدود م ـ ايو وزيف لهياتصال كوتاه كه به وس اني
1استاندارد يها هيبر اساس توص ديبا نيزم يها ميسطح مقطع س
و به داخل تابلو ارتباط دارند با شوند يدرب تابلو نصب م يكه رو يزاتيتجه يدر صورت نياز، برانوار پ لهيبه وس ديبا ها يكش مينوع س نيا. استفاده شود دو سر دسته س. رنديبل انعطاف قرار گقا سي وي پيت
.گردد يريجلوگها ناليها در محل ترم مورد آن
لهيبه وس ديآن با ينصب شده رو ليدرب تابلو و وسا
شده و با شماره يگذار شماره ميدر دو سر س ديهــا با يكابل به صـورت غـلاف سـوار شـده باشـند يرو يكيپلاست
.نقشه سازنده مطابقت داشته باشد
گيـره نوع يهاترمينال به بايد و باشند داشته كابلشو بايد ديبا يا حلقه ياز كابلشو .گردد پرهيز كابلشو و مهره
دائم ـ يها مدار مربوطه با شماره يها بر اساس نقشه د .باشد IEC 60445بر اساس استاندارد ديبا هاناليترم
جهت اتصال س. وصل شوند مياز دو س شتريب دينبا هانالياز ترم .از رابط استفاده شود
درهاي ـانداز و ف قدرت، راه يهاديدر انواع كل ناليو ترم
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
گرفتن انشعاب به صورت اتصال مستق يبرا 3- 7-32 ستيبا يم ميس زيسا
به صورت كابلشو حلقه ديبا
كه س يدر جاي 4- 7-3در نظر گرفت ديرا با يگريد
يكش ميمام ست 5- 7-3يجر نيمحيط و همچن
.باشند
سطح مقطع س 6- 7-3
در صورت نياز، برا 7- 7-3 قابل انعطاف يها ميس
ت در كاندوئي ايشود و مورد آن يشود كه از حركت ب
درب تابلو و وسا ايدرپوش و 8- 7-3 .همبند شوند
يكش ميتمام س 9- 7-3 يها شماره ــايشده و نقشه سازنده مطابقت داشته باشد يبند شماره
بايد هاسيم تمام 10- 7-3مهره و پيچ ميان مستقيم
.استفاده شود انيجر
ديبا هاناليترم 11- 7-3ترم يگذار باشند، علامت
از ترم كيبه هر 12- 7-3از رابط استفاده شود ديبا
ميشماره س 13- 7-3 .باشند يكي ديدارند، با
.در نظر گرفته شود
IEC پـلاك يبـوده و اطلاعـات رو ياز جنس سخت و مقاوم در مقابـل خـوردگ
آن، اليآن، نوع و شماره سـر ينام سازنده و علامت تجار
.تابلو نصب شده باشند
دارند، به طور مثـال آزاد نمـودن ي
.لوح دستورالعمل نصب شده باشد
يعادريو غ يعاد طيرا تحت تمام شراهاي برقدار تابلو يا انجام ، لمس بخش
.نباشد ريتواند منجر به جرقه شود، امكان پذ
مربوطـه در زاتي ـعملكـرد تجه يبـرا از نـوع دي ـباقفـل داخلـي هـاي سـتم
هـا و درپـوش مجهز باشند كـه بـاز نمـودن درب فقـط در ديجداكننده با ديكل. ممكن باشدخـود قـرار يكاملا در جا زين ييا درپوش بدنه راه انداز كاملا بسته بوده و دستگاه كشوئ
ديدر مدار كنترل با يكيالكترقفل داخلي
1- Interlock System
2- Interlocks
April 2019
IPS
14
در نظر گرفته شود ديكنترل هر تابلو با ناليترم يبرا ياضاف ناليترم 10
IEC 61439-1بر اسـاس اسـتاندارد ديها با پلاك مشخصات دستگاه
از جنس سخت و مقاوم در مقابـل خـوردگ ديپلاك مزبور با. شود ديشركت تأي ندهي
نام سازنده و علامت تجار: باشد ريشامل اطلاعات ز ديدستگاه حداقل با .دستگاه و شماره استاندارد مربوطه ينام
يدر هر دو قسمت ثابت و كشوي ديكشودار با يبرچسب واحدها
يبيبه اقدامات ترت اجيمختلف تابلو احت يها قسمت ات
لوح دستورالعمل نصب شده باشد اتيدر محل عمل ديبا
2هاي داخليقفلو ي
را تحت تمام شرا يمنيحداكثر درجه ا ديبا فيقدرت و فرمان فشار ضع، لمس بخشناخواسته و بدون استفاده از ابزار مخصوص يدسترس
تواند منجر به جرقه شود، امكان پذ ياز تابلو كه م يقسمتهائ
بـرا مـن ياقفـل داخلـي مجهـز بـه ديبا درهايقدرت و فسـتم يس. باشد IEC 61439مطابق الزامات استاندارد
.
مجهز باشند كـه بـاز نمـودن درب قفل داخلي ستميبه س يطور ديانداز موتورها باممكن باشد ريحالت روشن است، غ يجداكننده رو ديكه كل
يا درپوش بدنه راه انداز كاملا بسته بوده و دستگاه كشوئ
قفل داخلي چپگرد راستگرد علاوه بر ايدو سرعته و يانداز موتورها .هم باشد يكيمكان
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
10 % حداقل 14- 7-3
پلاك مشخصات دستگاه 15- 7-3توسط نما ديدستگاه با
.باشد
دستگاه حداقل با پلاكنام تيتاريخ توليد، ظرف
برچسب واحدها 16- 7-3
اتيعمل يوقت 17- 7-3
با ،1داخلي قفل ستميس
يمنيملاحظات ا 7-4
قدرت و فرمان فشار ضع يهاتابلو 7-4-1دسترس. دارا باشد ياتيعمل
قسمتهائ هرگونه عملياتي در
قدرت و ف يدهايكل 7-4-2مطابق الزامات استاندارد يكيالكتر يها ستميس
. باشند يكيمكان
انداز موتورها با راه 7-4-3كه كل يانداز در موقع راه
يا درپوش بدنه راه انداز كاملا بسته بوده و دستگاه كشوئ/ها و كه درب يموارد .عمل كند ،دارد
انداز موتورها راه 7-4-4مكانقفل داخلي مجهز به
ديبا ،اند خطرناك در نظر گرفته شدهبدون به كاربردن ابزار، يكيمكانقفل داخلي
اي ـ ي داخلـي هـا قفـل مشخصـات . .شركت برسد نده
در دي ـدار ثابت در داخـل بدنـه تـابلو با
يقسمت عمـود كيجرقه از يقرار داده شود كه از انتشار احتمال .دينما يريبدنه جلوگ
گفتـه IEC 60947كـــه در اسـتاندارد .محدود شود
در دي ـسـازنده با . اتصال كوتاه را تحمل كنـد ها، راه انـدازها و دي ـهـا، كل نهيش ـ ل
نيزم نهيبه هم و به ش ديبا ،باشد ي .وصل شوند يقابل انعطاف به بدنه اصل
قطع قدرت هوايي اسـتفاده دياز كل
از . باشـند يچهـار پـل كشـوئ هوائي
فاقـد بـار تكفـاز باشـد، سـتم يس اي ـ
1- Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
April 2019
IPS
15
خطرناك در نظر گرفته شده ياتيعمل ياز خطا يريكه جهت جلوگ يا ي داخليقفل داخلي چنانچه. نكند رييتغ يساخته شوند كه ساختار آن به آسان
. استفاده نمـود ) ديقفل و كل زميمكان( ياز قفل دست ندهينما ديبه تأي ديبا ،شوند مياستفاده ديحفاظت قفل و كل
دار ثابت در داخـل بدنـه تـابلو با برق يها از تابلو جدا شده باشد، قسمت يقسمت كشوئ .از تماس، حفاظت شده باشد
قرار داده شود كه از انتشار احتمال يا به گونه ديبا موانع انتشار جرقهبدنه جلوگ گريمحفظه به محفظه د كياز زيو ن گريد ي
كـــه در اسـتاندارد يا بـه اندازه ديبرق با انيحامل جر يقسمتها محدود شود ،كه در داده برگ اعلام خواهد شد يطيمح طيشرا
اتصال كوتاه را تحمل كنـد انياز جر يناش يكيناميو د يحرارت يها تنشلياتصال كوتاه در تمام اجزاء تابلو از قب انيميزان تحمل جر
يم زيبرق در تابلو كه شامل بدنه ن انيبدون جر يفلزقابل انعطاف به بدنه اصل يمس ميبا س يبه بدنه اصل د
هاي اصلي تابلو
كليد قطع قدرت هوائي ورودي
از كل ديبا نهيدو ش نيها و اتصال ب يورود يبرا ف،يفشار ضع
هوائي دياز نوع كل ديبا نهيو رابط اتصال دو ش يقدرت ورود
.منظور استفاده شود نيا يبرا دينبا 1كيقدرت نوع اتومات
اي ـو شود يم هيترانسفورماتور تغذ كيكه تابلو صرفا از .استفاده نمود يورود يبرا زيسه پل ن
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ي داخليها قفل هيكل 7-4-5ساخته شوند كه ساختار آن به آسان يطور
ديدارد، با رييامكان تغحفاظت قفل و كل يكه برا يقطعات
قسمت كشوئ يوقت 7-4-6از تماس، حفاظت شده باشد يريجهت جلوگ
موانع انتشار جرقه 7-4-7يتابلو به قسمت عمود
يدما شيافزا 7-4-8شرابراساس شده است و
تنش ديتابلو با 7-4-9ميزان تحمل جر شنهاد،يزمان پ
. ديرا اعلام نما رهيغ
فلز يها قسمت 7-4-10ديها با درب. وصل شوند
هاي اصلي تابلو قسمت 8
كليد قطع قدرت هوائي ورودي 8-1
فشار ضع يدر تابلو 1- 8-1 . كرد
قدرت ورود يدهايكل 2- 8-1
قدرت نوع اتومات يدهايكل
كه تابلو صرفا از يدر موارد 3- 8-1سه پل ن دياز كل توان يم
عملكرد ـش،يآزما ت،يدر رابطه با ظرف
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان
و ظرفيـت 1ظرفيت نهايي مجاز قطع جريان اتصـال كوتـاه
.باشند
كاملا با تابلو و متعلقـات نصـب ديشده، با
با در نظر گرفتن و IEC يهاي استانداردهاشوند كـه يطراح يطور ديبا يقدرت ورود
يخال يها در قسمت ندهيكه در آ ي
شـده نيـي قـدرت تع بياتصال كوتــاه و ضـر IEC 60947 بـه آن اشـاره شـده بـه
.باشد
ايو انيجر يها اتصال كوتاه بدون استفاده از محدود كننده
با موتور ديشارژ فنر با. فنر شارژ شده باشدسه عملكرد قطـع، وصـل، قطـع را
.از وصل مجدد ناخواسته باشد
بـا حفاظـت ميمسـتق V 110 دي ـقـدرت با هي ـمنبـع تغذ سـتم ياز س ميمستق
V 230 از بـرق ،كنـد دي ـشركت تأي
1- Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu)
2- Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity
3- Trip
April 2019
IPS
16
در رابطه با ظرف IEC 60947-2استانـدارد راساسب ديباهوائي قدرت ).B يبند براساس طبقه. (و جهت كاركرد بدون وقفه مناسب باشد
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان
ظرفيت نهايي مجاز قطع جريان اتصـال كوتـاه . بيني شده در محل نصب باشند
باشند ابردر كليد قطع هوايي بايد بر 2سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
شده، با نييتع IEC 60947-2قدرت كه در استانـــدارد .طابقت داشته باشد
هاي استانداردها هيبر اساس توص ديقدرت با يدهايكل ينام انقدرت ورود يدهايكل. دنگرد انتخابدرج شده در داده برگ،
يدرهائيفرزرو و يدرهايشامل بار ف يتمام بار ارائه شده در نقشه تك خط .دينما نيم
اتصال كوتــاه و ضـر تيبــا ظرف ديقدرت با يدهاياتصال كوتاه كل 2-60947قدرت كه در استاندارد يدهايقطع و وصل كل
باشد ترمتقارن، كم ينام جريانثر ؤمقدار م kA 105و
اتصال كوتاه بدون استفاده از محدود كننده انيقادر به قطع جر ديقدرت با
فنر شارژ شده باشد ياز نوع انرژ ديبا يقدرت هوائ يدهايعملكرد كل تيقابل ديشارژ شده با يفنر زميمكان. انجام شود يبا اهرم دست
از وصل مجدد ناخواسته باشد يريمجهز به مدار جلوگ ديقدرت با
قـدرت با دي ـمدار كل 3پيولتاژ شارژ فنر موتور و ولتاژ بستن و تر V110 برق. كه در داده برگ ارائه شده باشد يمستقل باشد، به جز موارد
شركت تأي ندهيكه نما يدر صورت. خواهد شد نيمأت ميبرق مستق .استفاده نمود توان يمتناوب جهت شارژ فنر موتور م
circuit breaking capacity (Icu)
circuit breaking capacity (Ics)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
قدرت يدهايكل 4- 8-1و جهت كاركرد بدون وقفه مناسب باشد
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان 5- 8-1
بيني شده در محل نصب باشند كوتاه پيشاتصال
سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
قدرت كه در استانـــدارد يدهايكل 6- 8-1طابقت داشته باشدشده در آن م
انيجر تيظرف 7- 8-1درج شده در داده برگ، يطيمح طيشرا
تمام بار ارائه شده در نقشه تك خطمأنصب خواهند شد را ت
اتصال كوتاه كل تيظرف 8- 8-1 تيظرف. متناسب باشد
kA 50 از دينبا بيترت
قدرت با يدهايكل 9- 8-1 .باشند وزهايف
عملكرد كل زميمكان 10- 8-1با اهرم دست زيو ن يبرق
.داشته باشد
قدرت با يدهايكل 11- 8-1
ولتاژ شارژ فنر موتور و ولتاژ بستن و تر 12- 8-1مستقل باشد، به جز موارد
برق مستق يخانه فرع ديكلمتناوب جهت شارژ فنر موتور م
. قطع باشـد يمواز چيپ ميو س يدست. منظور كنترل از راه دور مناسب باشند
.را در داده برگ انتخاب كند
.شود يريجلوگ ياراد رياز عملكرد غ
بسـته شـدن و زميمكـان شيجهت آزما
مـدار دي ـبا يحالت كشـوئ زميمكان. در دي ـكـه كل يزمـان . نگـه دارد »خارج شده
1مكـانيكي قفـل داخلـي كشو به صـورت
دي ـبا رهيمانند دستگ يكمك يكيقدرت توسط اپراتور، ادوات مكان .و قطع را داشته باشد شيقفل شدن در حالت آزما
هـا در هـا و كابـل نهيجهت پوشاندن محل اتصال به ش كنـد يقدرت به سمت حالت اتصال حركت م
.ها به رنگ قرمز و در طرف كابلها به رنگ زرد باشند
مفاصـل توسـط دي ـبا) اتصال كليد بـه مـدار كنتـرل اتي ـاجـازه عمل دي ـبا سـتم يهـر دو س
قدرت لازم است، حـداقل دو عـدد كنتاكـت در N/C ( دي ـبا يمشابه كنتاكـت كمك ـ
در داده بـرگ نشـان ،لازم باشـد ز
كه در داخـل يقابل دسترس ناليبه ترمبه طور واضـح و ديمربوطه با ميو س
ـ. اي كه در نقشه نشان داده شده اسـت، مشـخص شـود فيـدرهاي مشـابه، رايب
1- Mechanically Interlocked
April 2019
IPS
17
دست پيقطع كننده تر زميداراي هر دو مكان ديقدرت بامنظور كنترل از راه دور مناسب باشند به ديقدرت با يدهايكل. شود هيتعب ديفنر با يو دست
را در داده برگ انتخاب كند يكنترل محل اينحوه كنترل از راه دور و
از عملكرد غ ديبا يمحل يكنترل دست ديكل يبا نصب حفاظ مناسب بر رو
جهت آزما يا لهيوس ديبا ،است شيقدرت در حالت آزما د . شود هيقدرت تعب
. سه حالت مشخص وجود داشته باشد ديقدرت با يخارج شده«و »شيآزما«، »متصل شده«در سه حالت
كشو به صـورت يبــا محور جابجائ ديقدرت با ديقطع كل لهي . دينما يريجلوگ ديباشد تا از داخل و خارج نمودن كل
قدرت توسط اپراتور، ادوات مكان ديكل تيوضع رييجهت سهولت تغقفل شدن در حالت آزما تيقابل ديقدرت با ديكل .شود ه
جهت پوشاندن محل اتصال به ش كيمجهز به شاتر اتومات ديقدرت باقدرت به سمت حالت اتصال حركت م ديكه كل يدر موقع ديموقع خارج نمودن كليد باشند، شاترها با
ها به رنگ قرمز و در طرف كابلها به رنگ زرد باشند نهيدر طرف ش
اتصال كليد بـه مـدار كنتـرل /هياتصال ثانو(قدرت دياتصالات مدار كنترل كلهـر دو س . كابل كنترل قابل انعطاف برقرار گردد ايمحور و
.بدهد شيقدرت را در حالت آزما
قدرت لازم است، حـداقل دو عـدد كنتاكـت در ديعملكرد كل يكه برا يكمك يها علاوه بر كنتاكتN/C(دو عدد كنتاكت در حالت عادي بسته و حداقل)
زي ـن ياضاف ياگر كنتاكت كمك. شده باشد يكش ميس
به ترم ديقدرت، با ديمدار كمكي متصل به كل هاي يو س ناليهر ترم. شوند يگذار قدرت نصب شده متصل و شماره
اي كه در نقشه نشان داده شده اسـت، مشـخص شـود روشن با همان نماد و شماره .گذاري بايد يكسان باشد
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
قدرت با ديكل پيتر 13- 8-1و دست يآزاد كننده برق
نحوه كنترل از راه دور و ديبا داريخر
با نصب حفاظ مناسب بر رو 14- 8-1
ديكه كل يوقت 15- 8-1قدرت تعب ديمدار كل پيتر
يدهايكل يبرا 16- 8-1در سه حالت قايقدرت را دق ديكل
يحالت روشن باشد، وسباشد تا از داخل و خارج نمودن كل
جهت سهولت تغ 17- 8-1هيتعب 7-9براساس بند
قدرت با يدهايكل 18- 8-1موقع خارج نمودن كليد باشند، شاترها با
در طرف ش ديشاترها با. باز شوند
اتصالات مدار كنترل كل 19- 8-1محور و ميخود تنظ محكم و
قدرت را در حالت آزما ديكل شيآزما
علاوه بر كنتاكت 20- 8-1) N/O(حالت عادي باز
ناليو تا سر ترم هيتعب .داده خواهد شد
يكش ميس هيكل 21- 8-1قدرت نصب شده متصل و شماره ديمحفظه كل
روشن با همان نماد و شمارهگذاري بايد يكسان باشد فرآيند شماره
را داشـته گريكـد يبـا ينيگزيجـا ت .نداشته باشند
بسته كنتاكت و حالت شارژ /داشته باشند كه وضعيت باز يهـا هيقرمز و سبز براساس توص ـ ي
گـر به علاوه چراغ نشان. باز نشان دهد
جهـت ديچراغ سف كيبه همراه ) تريپ
.شودبراي فيدرها منظور
مجزاي لازم كـه در نقشـه يحفاظتهاي حفاظتي همـراه در صورت استفاده از رله
ري ـهـاي ز ويژگـي يحداقل دارا دي :شوند يم
)آمپرمتر
كـه در 1يك ـيالكتر قفل داخلـي ستم
مشـخص دسـتي /2ها، سيستم انتقال خودكار
1- Electrical Interlocks
2- Automatic Transfer System (ATS)
April 2019
IPS
18
تيكاملا قابل دياژ كنترل مشابه باو ولت تيقدرت با ظرفنداشته باشند ينيگزيجا تيمتفاوت قابل تيقدرت با ظرف
داشته باشند كه وضعيت باز يكيمكان يگرها نشان ديقدرت بايها گر به رنگ نشان يها داراي چراغ ديتابلو با نيهمچن
IEC باز نشان دهد ايها را در حالت بسته و ديكل تيبوده كه موقع .شود هياز خطا تعب يمنظور نشان دادن قطع مدار ناش
تريپ(ارت بر مدار فرمان قطع نظ ستميس يدارا ديقدرت با . آن باشد هيو مدار تغذ) تريپ(مدار فرمان قطع
براي فيدرها منظور بايد “گر هاي نشان آزمايش صحت چراغ
حفاظت يها دهنده و رله نشان يبه ابزارها ديبا يقدرت وروددر صورت استفاده از رله. مجهز باشند ،برگ نشان داده شده است در داده
يبا يورود يكليدها نياز ا كيهر . كليد، مراتب بايد به تأييد كارفرما برسدم ينام گذار ANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2)ها بر اساس استاندارد
)51/50(يو زمان ي
) N51N/50(يو زمان يآن ني
)27/47(حفاظت افت ولتاژ و كنترل توالي فازها
آمپرمتر كيسه آمپرمتر مجزا، براي هر فاز اي( يتيچند وضع
فازها يتيچند وضع
.هاي حفاظتي بايد مطابق با نقشه تك خطي در نظر گرفته شوند
ستميو س يحفاظت يها به رله ديها با نهيقدرت رابط اتصال ش .نشان داده شده است، مجهز باشد
ها، سيستم انتقال خودكار داده برگيا /هاي تكي خطي و در صورتي كه در نقشه .مراجعه شود IPS-E-EL-100شده باشد، به استاندارد
(ATS)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
قدرت با ظرف يهاديكل 22- 8-1قدرت با ظرف يها ديباشند و كل
قدرت با يهاديكل 23- 8-1همچن. فنر را نشان دهند
IEC 60073 استاندارد
منظور نشان دادن قطع مدار ناش به ديزرد رنگ با
قدرت با ديكل 24- 8-1مدار فرمان قطع ينشان دادن سلامت
آزمايش صحت چراغ”تمهيدات 25- 8-1
قدرت ورود يها ديكل 26- 8-1در داده ايو يتك خط
كليد، مراتب بايد به تأييد كارفرما برسدها بر اساس استاندارد رله. باشد
يآن انياضافه جر رله -
يزم انيرله اضافه جر -
حفاظت افت ولتاژ و كنترل توالي فازها -
چند وضع ديآمپرمتر با كل -
چند وضع ديكلمتر با ولت -
هاي حفاظتي بايد مطابق با نقشه تك خطي در نظر گرفته شوند رله ساير
قدرت رابط اتصال ش ديكل 27- 8-1نشان داده شده است، مجهز باشد ينقشه تك خط
در صورتي كه در نقشه 28- 8-1شده باشد، به استاندارد
حفظـه جداگانـه در م بوده و هركـدام .در داده برگ نشان داده شود
راستگرد -موتور تك سرعته، دوسرعته و چپگرد
.گردد تيها رعا در آن بايد
ايو V 400 فاز 3 يكيجهت كنترل بار الكتركه هر kV 6ايو V 400از توان ي
:باشند IPS-E-EL-100مطابق با استاندارد
، يا )دون حفاظت اضافه بارب( 3كياتومات
دهي ـد ينشان دهنده كه در نقشه تك خط
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان و ) Icu( ظرفيت نهـايي مجـاز قطـع جريـان اتصـال كوتـاه
.باشند ابربايد بر نوع كمپكت
IEC 60947-4-1 فيـدرهاي . باشـند .صوص به كارفرما ارائه نمايدباشند و سازنده بايد مدارك لازم را در اين خ
1- Direct on Line (DOL)
2- High Rupturing Capacity (HRC)
3- Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
4- Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
April 2019
IPS
19
موتور يها
بوده و هركـدام ياز نوع كشوئ ديبا يموتور ياندازها راه ف،يفشار ضعدر داده برگ نشان داده شود ايو يخطمشخصات فني موتور بايد در نقشه تك
موتور تك سرعته، دوسرعته و چپگرد نشان داده شده، يكه در نقشه تك خط
بايد IEC 60947-4شده و الزامات يانداز راه 1برخط م
جهت كنترل بار الكتر فيفشار ضع يموتوري نصب شده در تابلويرا م kW150 يولتاژ موتورها. (شوند يم يطراح 150
). كدام موجود باشد استفاده كرد
مطابق با استاندارد ريز زاتيحداقل شامل تجه ديموتور با
اتومات ديكل اي ،جداساز ديبا كل 2با قدرت قطع اتصال كوتاه بالا با توافق كارفرما) بدون حفاظت اضافه بار( 4
يالزام
نشان دهنده كه در نقشه تك خط يهاو ابزار يكنترل زاتيتجه از،يمورد ن يحفاظت .استاندارد مشخص شده باشد ن
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان ظرفيت نهـايي مجـاز قطـع جريـان اتصـال كوتـاه . بيني شده در محل نصب باشندنوع كمپكتدر كليد قطع ) Ics(ظرفيت سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
1كليه فيدرهاي راه انداز موتوري بايد مطـابق الزامـات اسـتاندارد
باشند و سازنده بايد مدارك لازم را در اين خ 2سازي مذكور بايد از نوع هماهنگ
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ها كنترل كننده 8-2
فشار ضع يدر تابلو 8-2-1مشخصات فني موتور بايد در نقشه تك تعداد و . نصب شوند
كه در نقشه تك خط يبجز موارد 8-2-2
ميبه صورت مستق ديبا
موتوري نصب شده در تابلو يراه اندازها 8-2-3kW150موتورها تا توان
كدام موجود باشد استفاده كرد
موتور با ياندازها راه 8-2-4
با قدرت قطع اتصال كوتاه بالا يوزهايف -
4كليد حفاظت موتوري
كنتاكتور -
الزام يحفاظت يها رله -
حفاظت يها رله ريسا -نيكه در ا نيا ايشده و
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع كننده بايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان 8-2-5بيني شده در محل نصب باشند اتصال كوتاه پيش
ظرفيت سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
كليه فيدرهاي راه انداز موتوري بايد مطـابق الزامـات اسـتاندارد 8-2-6مذكور بايد از نوع هماهنگ
ـ . باشـد IEC 60947-3براسـاس دياز جلو تابلو بـدون بـازكردن ديها با
IECبـر اسـاس اسـتاندارد دي ـبا 1
براسـاس اسـتاندارد AC-3طبقـه
AC-4طبقـه از كنتـاكتور دي ـمعكـوس با
كي ـحـداقل رود، يعملكرد استارتر بكار م ـهـر يبـرا ديبا يكمك يها بسته به عنوان كنتاكت
.شده باشد
.درخواست شده باشد
در هـر محفظـه ر كنترل ايزوله اتوترانسفورممـدار . شود، باشـد ه ميتغذي اند، انداز موتور كه توسط نماينده شركت مشخص شدهرا در داده يگـر يولتـاژ كنتـرل د
ني ـا يموتور بـرا يها انداز از راه ك
) تـوان سـيلينگ (هاي كنترل از جريان مربوط به توان قابل تحمل پيچ كنتاكتور بيشتر باشد، سازنده بايد الزامات انطباق جهت استفاده از كنتاكتور بزرگتر يا تـوان تحمـل
هـاي شـركت جزئيـات كابـل . ها با تأييد نماينده شركت قابل قبـول اسـت
و آزمـون عملكـرد يجهـت انتخـاب حالـت عـاد يكه مدار كنترل از مدار اصل شيدر حالت آزما. شده، متصل گـردد هيمنظور تعب ن
.كرد شيراه انداز را آزما
1- High Rupturing Capacity (HRC)
2- Inching
April 2019
IPS
20
ي ـبا) بار ريقابل قطع ز ريقابل و غ( وزهايف-چيسوئ يهاها با جداكننده. باشند AC-23از طبقه ستيبا يبار م ريقابل قطع ز
1بالا تاهبا قدرت قطع اتصال كو وزيف. پوشش آن قابل عملكرد باشند
يبـرا يو از نوع هواي يسيپل با عملكرد مغناط 3 دي
معكـوس با سيسرو اي 2اينچينگ ييالقا يموتورها يبرا.
عملكرد استارتر بكار م ـ يكه برا يو كنتاكت كمك ياصل يها علاوه بــر كنتاكتبسته به عنوان كنتاكت يكنتاكت در حالت عاد كيباز و يشده باشد يكش ميبلوك محفظه، س ناليبه ترم ديشود و با ه
كيمطابق با نقشه شمات ديموتور با ياندازها نقشه مدار فرمان راه
ترانسفورممتناوب كه از V 230 تك فاز ديكنتاكتور باانداز موتور كه توسط نماينده شركت مشخص شده مجزا يا در هر محفظه راه
دار،يكه خر يدر حالت. مناسب محافظت شده باشد وزكيهر يلازم برا يكمك زاتيتجه دياعلام كند، با ينقشه تك خط
هاي كنترل از جريان مربوط به توان قابل تحمل كابلدر جايي كه جريان خازني پيچ كنتاكتور بيشتر باشد، سازنده بايد الزامات انطباق جهت استفاده از كنتاكتور بزرگتر يا تـوان تحمـل
ها با تأييد نماينده شركت قابل قبـول اسـت حل ساير راه. .كنترلي را ارائه خواهد داد
جهـت انتخـاب حالـت عـاد يتيچند وضع ديكل يدارا ديموتور بادر حالت آزما. باشند ،شوند يم زولهيا يكه از مدار اصل
نيبد دازان كه در هر مدار راه يبه سوكت نر ديمدار كنترل باراه انداز را آزما توان يوصل بوده و م يحالت ولتاژ كنترل به سوكت نر
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ها بيانواع ترك 8-2-7قابل قطع ز يها چيسوئ
پوشش آن قابل عملكرد باشند ايدرب .باشد 60269-1
يكنتاكتورها با 8-2-8
IEC 60947-4 باشد . .استفاده كرد
علاوه بــر كنتاكت 8-2-9يكنتاكت در حالت عاد
هياز كنتاكتورها تعب كي
نقشه مدار فرمان راه 8-2-10
كنتاكتور با يولتاژ نام 8-2-11مجزا يا در هر محفظه راه
وزيف كيبا ديكنترل بانقشه تك خط ايبرگ و
.گردد هيمنظور ته
در جايي كه جريان خازني 8-2-12پيچ كنتاكتور بيشتر باشد، سازنده بايد الزامات انطباق جهت استفاده از كنتاكتور بزرگتر يا تـوان تحمـل سيم
. بيشتر را رعايت نمايدكنترلي را ارائه خواهد داد
موتور با ياندازها راه 8-2-13كه از مدار اصل يزمان ياندازها برا راه
مدار كنترل با باشد، يمجزا محالت ولتاژ كنترل به سوكت نر نيدر ا
هي ـتغذ(آزمايشـي V 230 ولتاژ هي نيمناسـب جهـت مـدار كنتـرل بزرگتـر
در محفظـه مربـوط دي ـبا يش ـيولتـاژ آزما درب محفظه نصب شده باشد، وصل
يانعطاف با سوكت و پلاگ مناسب به منظور اعمال ولتاژ آزمون قابل اتصال به پلاگ نـر كابـل قابـل . گـردد نيتوسط سازنده تأم ري ـگ چيهر قسمت از سوئاندازها كه در
ني ـا 1-9خاموش براساس الزامات بنـد
در دي ـباشـد با يانداز قابـل دسترس ـ ،نشان داده شـده اسـت يكه در نقشه تك خط
).13-2-8در بند رجمند شيآزما
شـود يانداز نصب م ابلو راهدرب ت ي
. لحـاظ شـود يك ـيالكترون اي ـ ميمستقتـك فـاز بتوانـد طيكه كنتاكتور در شـرا
سه فاز و مجهز به جبرانگـر قابـل دو گـراد يدرجه سـانت 50در محدوده صفر درجه تا
يرو سـت ير يشسـت . شود برهيآمپر كال
April 2019
IPS
21
يمنبع تغذ كي ،به جز مواردي كه در نقشه نشان داده شده استمناسـب جهـت مـدار كنتـرل بزرگتـر وزي ـنمودن و ف زولهيا ليبه وسامجهز ) زولهي
ولتـاژ آزما هي ـمنبـع تغذ . شود هيتعب نهيدر هر قسمت شدرب محفظه نصب شده باشد، وصل يكه در رو) حداقل دو عدد( پلبه سوكت دو ديشده باشد و با
انعطاف با سوكت و پلاگ مناسب به منظور اعمال ولتاژ آزمون قابل اتصال به پلاگ نـر توسط سازنده تأم ديبا دهيمشخص گرد 13-2-8اندازها همانگونه كه در بند اندازها كه در راه تا بتواند ولتاژ آزمون را به همهطول كافي داشته باشد
.ديمتصل نما شيقرار دارند، به منظور آزما
خاموش براساس الزامات بنـد /روشن يكنترل محل ستگاهيا يدارا ديموتور با
انداز قابـل دسترس ـ محفظه راه رونيماندگار كه از ب ستير/ خاموش يكه در نقشه تك خط يبه جز موارد .موتور نصب شود ياندازها
آزما طيشرا يبه جز برا( ستين ازيانداز ن روشن نمودن در محفظه راه
يكه در رو ر،يدهنده ز نشان يها به چراغ ديانداز با هر دستگاه راه
)On(روشن تيچراغ قرمز جهت وضع
)Off(خاموش تيچراغ سبز جهت وضع
)Fault( بيع تيچراغ زرد جهت وضع
مستق يرله اضافه بار حرارت ديبا kW30 موتور تا ياندازهاكه كنتاكتور در شـرا يداشته باشد بطور ديبا زيفاز ن كيرله، حفاظت قطع
ديبا يكيالكترون اي ياضافه بار حرارت يرله حفاظت. را انجام دهددر محدوده صفر درجه تا ديبا يرله حرارت پيمشخصه تر. باشد
آمپر كال يبر مبنا مايمستق يرله حرارت ميتنظ زانيم. باشد
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
به جز مواردي كه در نقشه نشان داده شده است 8-2-14شده از ترانسفورماتور ا
در هر قسمت ش ديدستگاه استارتر باشده باشد و با يجاساز
.شود
انعطاف با سوكت و پلاگ مناسب به منظور اعمال ولتاژ آزمون قابل اتصال به پلاگ نـر كابل قابل 8-2-15اندازها همانگونه كه در بند راه يتمام
طول كافي داشته باشد ديانعطاف باقرار دارند، به منظور آزما
موتور با ياندازها راه 8-2-16 . استاندارد باشد
يدكمه فشار 8-2-17اندازها قسمت جلو تمام راه
روشن نمودن در محفظه راه يشست
هر دستگاه راه 8-2-18 :مجهز شده باشد
چراغ قرمز جهت وضع -
چراغ سبز جهت وضع -
چراغ زرد جهت وضع -
اندازها راه يبرا 8-2-19رله، حفاظت قطع نيعلاوه بر ا
را انجام دهد پيعمل ترباشد طيمح يدما ميتنظ
باشد كنواختيبصورت .شود يدرب نصب م
عمـل انيكه توسط ترانسفورماتور جركــــه از ترانسـفورماتور نياتصال بـــه زم ـ
بار كامل انيجر 10% تا حدود ديبا يهـا علاوه بر رلـه زين بر در تكفاز شدن
كنتـرل كـه بـر طبـق الزامـات يهـا
يكروپروسسـور يموتور از نوع م يحفاظت
انـداز نصـب شـده آمپرمتر كه در جلو تابلو راهمتصـل ،نصـب شـده اسـت يكه در فـاز وسـط
منظور نشان آمپر به كي هيثانو اني ستگاهيمتصل شده است، در ا انيترانسفورماتور جر
كـه ايـن ياما وقت ست،يبه نصب آمپرمتر نموتور، بايد آمپرمتر وجـود داشـته
را داشته ينيگزيجا تيقابل ديو مشابه دارند با نيگزيقابـل جـا دي ـمختلف باشـند، نبا
.پذير باشد امكان دياندازه خودش نبا
زي ـتجه دي ـشـود با ينشان داده م ي .اعلام شده در نظر گرفته شود
يقـدرت هـوائ دي ـكل اي ـ وزي ـف ديممكن است شامل كل .داده برگ ارائه خواهد شد
1- Core Balance
April 2019
IPS
22
كه توسط ترانسفورماتور جر ياضافه بار يها و بالاتر، رله kW 30يانداز موتورهااتصال بـــه زم ـ يآن يموتورها رله حفاظت نيا يبرا. بكار برده شود
با نياتصال زم رله. استفاده شود ديباشد، با 1اي بالانس دروازهبر در تكفاز شدنرله حفاظت در برا. دهد پيباشد كه كنتاكتور را تر
.لحاظ شود ديبا ن،ياضافه بار و اتصال زم
هـا يـا رلـه يحفاظت يها رله ريشامل سا ديبا يموتور . باشند زينشان داده شده است ن يبوده و در نقشه تك خط
حفاظت يها رله. استاندارد باشند نيا 3-9براساس بند .باشد
آمپرمتر كه در جلو تابلو راه كيبه ديو بالاتر با kW 4 يموتور ياندازهاكه در فـاز وسـط انيبه ترانسفورماتور جر ديآمپرمتر با نيبا جر انيجرمجهز به ترانسفورماتور دياندازها با راه ن
ترانسفورماتور جر نيكه به ا يآمپرمتر. موتور از راه دور باشند .شدموتور مربوطه نصب خواهد
به نصب آمپرمتر ن ازيانداز، ن راه ي، در تابلوkW 4كمتر از يموتورها يكنترل محل ستگاهييت نباشد، در اؤموتورها از محل روشن نمودن قابل ر
و مشابه دارند با كسانيو مدار كنترل تيراه انداز كه ظرفمختلف باشـند، نبا يكياز نظر الكتر ليمشابه هم و يكيكه از نظر مكان
اندازه خودش نبا هم يدريدر محفظه ف يانداز موتور به طور مثال قرار گرفتن راه
يطوركه در نقشه تك خط موتور همان دكي يموتوراعلام شده در نظر گرفته شود 8-1-7كه در بند ندهيجهت موارد استفاده در آ
)يبجز انواع موتور( يخروج
ممكن است شامل كل فيقدرت فشار ضع يتابلو يخروج ايو يقطع كننده در نقشه تك خط ايو وزيف ديكل در
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
انداز موتورها براي راه 8-2-20بكار برده شود ديبا كنند يم
بالانس دروازه از نوع انيجرباشد كه كنتاكتور را تر ميموتور قابل تنظ
اضافه بار و اتصال زم يحفاظت
موتور ياندازها راه 8-2-21بوده و در نقشه تك خط ينديفرآ
براساس بند ديها با رله 8-2-22باشد يمورد قبول م زين
اندازها راه هيكل 8-2-23نيا. باشد، مجهز باشند
نيا نيهمچن. گردد يمموتور از راه دور باشند انيدادن جر
موتور مربوطه نصب خواهد يكنترل محل
موتورها يبرا 8-2-24موتورها از محل روشن نمودن قابل ر
. باشد
راه انداز كه ظرف يها ماژول 8-2-25كه از نظر مكان ييها ماژول. باشندبه طور مثال قرار گرفتن راه. باشند
موتور ياندازها راه 8-2-26جهت موارد استفاده در آ يمحفظه خال. شود
خروج يدرهايف ريسا 8-3
خروج يدرهايف 1- 8-3درياندازه و نوع ف. باشد
تي ـتا ظرف تواند يشده باشد، م ديشركت تأي
A 400يقـدرت هـوائ دي ـكل دي ـ، با
در محفظه جداگانه ديبا ،باشد يم وزها
IEC وIEC 60947-3 باشند.
يـا سـه يتيچنـد وضـع دي ـآمپرمتر همـراه كل
اي كه در نقشـه نشـان به طور واضح و روشن با همان نماد و شماره .گذاري بايد يكسان باشد مشابه، فرآيند شماره
ايد بزرگتر يا مساوي جريان كننده بو ) Icu(ظرفيت نهـايي مجـاز قطـع جريـان اتصـال كوتـاه
.باشند رع هوايي بايد براب
اگر . قرار خواهند گرفت كننديكه آنها را كنترل م. شـود دي ـدر داده بـرگ ق دي ـقدرت با هم سفارش داده شـوند با
حداقل ديكنترل موتور با يمحل ستگاهدر توانـد مـي آمپرمتر. باشد مناسب
كنتـرل سـتگاه يدر ا دي ـبا وشدرحالت خـام
گردد و به آمپرمترها در هيانداز موتور تعب
1- Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
April 2019
IPS
23
شركت تأي ندهيكه توسط نما يدر صورت يخروج دري
Aبـالاتر از يهـا تي ـظرف يبرا. باشد 1كيقدرت اتومات
وزهايف ديكل ايقدرت ديكه شامل كل يخروج يدرها
IEC 60947-2بر اساس الزامات ديبا وزهايف ديقدرت و كل
آمپرمتر همـراه كل كيبا ديو بالاتر با A 100با توان يخروج .شود هيتعب) هر فاز يآمپرمتر برا
به طور واضح و روشن با همان نماد و شماره ديمربوطه با ميو سمشابه، فرآيند شماره يبراي فيدرهاي خروج. داده شده است، مشخص شود
كننده ب هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطعظرفيت نهـايي مجـاز قطـع جريـان اتصـال كوتـاه . بيني شده در محل نصب باشندع هوايي بايد برابدر كليد قط) Ics(ظرفيت سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
كنترل موتور يمحل
كه آنها را كنترل م ييموتورها كيكنترل موتور، نزد يمحلقدرت با هم سفارش داده شـوند با يكنترل موتور با تابلوها
.باشند IPS-M-EL-161مطابق با
ستگاهيبجز در مواردي كه در فلسفه سيستم كنترل بيان شده است، امناسب آمپرمتر با همراه لزوم صورت در و خاموش –روشن
درحالت خـام يامكان قفل كردن شست. كنترل موتور قرار گرفته باشد .موتور وجود داشته باشد
انداز موتور تعب راه يها در محفظه ديبا ايجداگانه انيجر يترانسفورماتورها .شوندوصل 4-9كنترل موتور براساس الزامات بند
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
يقدرت ف ديكل 2- 8-3
A 400 قدرت اتومات دياز نوع كل .استفاده شود
درهايهر كدام از ف 3- 8-3 .نصب شود
قدرت و كل يدهايكل 4- 8-3
خروج يدرهايف 5- 8-3آمپرمتر برا كي(آمپرمتر،
و س ناليهر ترم 6- 8-3داده شده است، مشخص شود
هر دو مقدار ظرفيت جريان اتصال كوتاه وصل و قطع كليد قطع 7- 8-3بيني شده در محل نصب باشند كوتاه پيش اتصال
ظرفيت سرويس مجاز قطع جريان اتصال كوتاه
يقطعات كمك 9
محل هاي ايستگاه 9-1
محل يها ستگاهيا 9-1-1كنترل موتور با تابلوها يمحل يها ستگاهيا
مطابق با ديالزامات مذكور با
بجز در مواردي كه در فلسفه سيستم كنترل بيان شده است، ا 9-1-2روشن يفشار يداراي شست
كنترل موتور قرار گرفته باشد ستگاهياموتور وجود داشته باشد
ترانسفورماتورها 9-1-3كنترل موتور براساس الزامات بند ستگاهيا
سـتگاه ينصب شـده در ا يها يشست
و براســاس يرونــيشــده ب يبنــد طبقــه
يكـه در نقشـه تـك خط ـ يكه در فلسفه سيستم كنترل بيان شده است، در صورت يرو ديبا »خودكار -صفر -يدست« بـدون « يبـه معنـا يتيسـه وضـع
در داده برگ نشان ايو يهمان طور كه در نقشه تك خط
IEC 60051 ساخته شود.
دسـتگاه مبـدل يدر داده برگ نشان داده شـده باشـد، خروج ـ ينظارت يها ستميبه س يآنالوگ انتخاب
درب تـابلو بـوده و حـداقل بـا درجـه .ساختمان باشند
راتيي ـتغ اي ـ انيترانسفورماتور جر
تجهيزات فوق از . يا بهتر باشند 5/1
موتـور يانداز راه انيبوده و تحمل جر يبنـد درجـه . بـار كامـل موتـور باشـد
ريگ نامي بار را در صفحه اندازه انيجر .آمپرمتر نشان داده شود
1- Distributed Control System (DCS)
April 2019
IPS
24
شست شوند تا به آمپرمتر و هيانداز تعب در محفظه راه ديبا .كنترل موتور وصل شوند
طبقــه يهــا مناســب محوطــه ديــكنتــرل موتــور با ي . مربوطه باشد
كه در فلسفه سيستم كنترل بيان شده است، در صورت ي اي »از راه دور -صفر -يمحل« يتيسه وضع يدهاينشان داده شده باشد، كل
يدهاي ـدركل »صـفر تيوضـع «عبـارت . ايستگاه كنترل محلي، نصب شود .منجر به خاموش شدن موتور شود ديو نبا شود
يريگ اندازه
همان طور كه در نقشه تك خط ديدهنده با و نشان يريگ اندازه .داده شده است در نظر گرفته شود
60051براساس الزامات استاندارد ديبا يريگ اندازه يها
در داده برگ نشان داده شـده باشـد، خروج ـ اي يكه در نقشه تك خطآنالوگ انتخاب يها گناليمنظور ارسال س ، به IEC 60668طبق استاندارد
.در نظر گرفته شود ديبا 1شده عيكنترل توز
درب تـابلو بـوده و حـداقل بـا درجـه ياز نوع مناسب جهت نصب بـر رو ديبا رگياندازهIP 55 ساختمان باشند يرونيو ب يداخل يها محوطه يبرا بيبه ترت
هيخطا در اول يها انيدر اثر عبور جر ديبا يرگياندازه .باشند يبردار قابل بهره ستميولتاژ در محدوده كار س
5كلاس دقت يدارا ديمترها و كنتورهاي آنالوگ با آمپرمترها، ولت .يا بهتر باشد 0/1داراي كلاس دقت
بوده و تحمل جر از نوع آنالوگ ديد بانرو يموتور به كار م يكه برابـار كامـل موتـور باشـد انيبرابر جر 6حداقل ديفشرده آمپرمتر با يبند
جر 120 % باشد كه حداقل يطور دينوع آمپرمترها باآمپرمتر نشان داده شود يبند با خط قرمز در درجه ديبار موتور با انيحداكثر جر
Distributed Control System (DCS)
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
با ييها ناليترم 9-1-4كنترل موتور وصل شوند يمحل
يمحلــ ســتگاهيا 9-1-5مربوطه باشد IPS ياستانداردها
يبجز در موارد 9-1-6نشان داده شده باشد، كل
ايستگاه كنترل محلي، نصب شودشوديم فيتعر »تيوضع
اندازه يها دستگاه 9-2
اندازه يها دستگاه 9-2-1داده شده است در نظر گرفته شود
ها دستگاه هيكل 9-2-2
كه در نقشه تك خط يدر صورت 9-2-34-20 mA طبق استاندارد
ستمياز راه دور مثل س
اندازه هايدستگاه 9-2-455و IP 41حفاظت بدنه
اندازه هايدستگاه 9-2-5ولتاژ در محدوده كار س
آمپرمترها، ولت 9-2-6داراي كلاس دقت دينوع ديجيتال با
كه برا ييآمپرمترها 9-2-7بند درجه. دنرا داشته باش
نوع آمپرمترها با نيجهت ا ريگ اندازهحداكثر جر. نمايش دهد
ــابلو ــالوگ نصــب شــده در ت ــقــدرت با يآن ــه شــكل مربــع دي ب
mm72 ×mm 72 اما انـدازه باشد،
بـر اسـاس آخـرين نسـخه نشـان داده شـده اسـت
. را داشته باشـند ينيگزيجا تيبا عملكرد يكسان بايد از نوع مشابه بوده و قابلاتصـال كي ـمربوطه را به طـور اتومات
هـاي حفـاظتي ميكروپروسسـوري بايـد قابليـت . عملكرد حفاظتي بايد به صورت مستقل قابليت فعـال شـدن را داشـته باشـند
.باشد هفعال و غيرفعال كردن هر عملكرد حفاظتي، نبايد تأثيري بر ساير عملكردها داشت
طـرح حفاظـت . هاي حفاظتي ميكروپروسسوري مجهز باشند
براي نمايش صحت تجهيز حفاظتي وجود داشته
.باشد 3افزار سخت
.باشد تياپراتور قابل رو
جهت جلوگيري از استارت مجدد خودكار بايد بـر توانند كه فقط مي) 49بجز رله اضافه بار حرارتي
ياز ترانسـفورماتورها كي ـهـر هي ـ
مربوطـه و ياستفاده شود، نرم افزارهـا
1- Fail Safe
2- Watchdog
3- Hardwire
April 2019
IPS
25
ــدازه يهــا تمــام دســتگاه ــابلو يريــگ ان ــالوگ نصــب شــده در ت آنباشد، يقابل قبول م زين mm96 × mm 96 اندازه . دنباش .باشند يواقع ريمقاد ديبا ريگ اندازه ي
ي
نشـان داده شـده اسـت يكه در نقشه تك خط يعملكرد حفاظتANSI C37.2 (IEEE C37.2) و نيز IPS-E-EL-100 باشد مي.
با عملكرد يكسان بايد از نوع مشابه بوده و قابل يحفاظتمربوطه را به طـور اتومات انيباشند كه با برداشتن هر رله، ترانسفورماتور جر
هـاي حفـاظتي ميكروپروسسـوري بايـد قابليـت و رلـه شيامكانات آزمـا ديبا يحفاظت عملكرد حفاظتي بايد به صورت مستقل قابليت فعـال شـدن را داشـته باشـند هر . پيكربندي را داشته باشند
فعال و غيرفعال كردن هر عملكرد حفاظتي، نبايد تأثيري بر ساير عملكردها داشت
هاي حفاظتي ميكروپروسسوري مجهز باشند كوپلر بايد به رله فيدر ورودي و باس
براي نمايش صحت تجهيز حفاظتي وجود داشته 2نظارتي-هاي خود ده و كنتاكتبو 1بايد بر مبناي طرح ايمن
سخت صورتهايي براي ارسال هشدار به تجهيز بايد داراي كنتاكت
اپراتور قابل رو يمجهز شود كه برا پيبه نشان دهنده نوع تر
.را داشته باشند يكردن دست ستير تي
جهت جلوگيري از استارت مجدد خودكار بايد بـر ) 86(يك رله جداگانه قفل شونده الكترومكانيكي بجز رله اضافه بار حرارتي (روي تمام فيدرهاي مجهز به كليد قدرت هوائي نصب شوند
.شوند ريست
ي ـهـاي ثانو ت هوايي، ترمينالدر كليه فيدرهاي مجهز به كليد قدر .قابل دسترس وصل شده باشد شيو ولتاژ بايد به بلوك رابط آزما
استفاده شود، نرم افزارهـا يزير قابل برنامه يتاليجيد يحفاظت يها كه از رله .ارائه گردد ديبا يابي بيع يراهنماي يها
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
تمــام دســتگاه 9-2-8mm 72 × mm 72 باش
يبند درجه. اولويت دارد
يحفاظت يها رله 9-3
عملكرد حفاظت يها كد 1- 9-3ANSI C37.2 استاندارد
حفاظت يها رله هيكل 2- 9-3باشند كه با برداشتن هر رله، ترانسفورماتور جر يها ترجيحا طور رله
. كوتاه كند
يها كليه رله 3- 9-3پيكربندي را داشته باشند
فعال و غيرفعال كردن هر عملكرد حفاظتي، نبايد تأثيري بر ساير عملكردها داشت
فيدر ورودي و باس هر 4- 9-3
بايد بر مبناي طرح ايمن
تجهيز بايد داراي كنتاكت. باشند
به نشان دهنده نوع تر ديها با رله 5- 9-3
يقابل ديها با رله 6- 9-3
يك رله جداگانه قفل شونده الكترومكانيكي 7- 9-3روي تمام فيدرهاي مجهز به كليد قدرت هوائي نصب شوند
ريستبه صورت دستي
در كليه فيدرهاي مجهز به كليد قدر 8- 9-3و ولتاژ بايد به بلوك رابط آزما انيجر
كه از رله يدر صورت 9- 9-3ها كتابچه ودستورالعمل
.باشند
و بـراي تجهيـزات A 5يـا A 1بايـد ينـام انيجر. آمپر باشد كيبايد ي
. شود
در صورت مغايرت . باشد يم انيترانسفورماتور جرترانسفورماتور جريـان را جهـت تأييـد
كـلاس دقـت . يـا بهتـر باشـند 1 د .يا بهتر باشند
سازنده رلـه . باشند 5P ديقدرت با ي ني ـدر ا. كنـد نيـي موتور را تع يحفاظت
جهـت حفاظـت اني ـجر يكلاس دقت ترانسـفورماتورها .باشد شده است، فيتعر
يكه ترانسفورماتورها يزمان. متصل باشند هيثانو يها ميسطح مقطع س. متصل باشد
هـاي قابـل دسترسـي كـه داراي رابـط
مربوطـه نصـب شـده يدر قسمت ثابت داخـل تـابلو .تابلو نصب شوند يدر قسمت كشوي
يشده تابلو را بدون صدمات حرارت
ضـريب امنيـت . و ضريب امنيت مورد لزوم را داشته باشند
.باشد IEC 61869-2براساس الزامات استاندارد
April 2019
IPS
26
انيجر يترانسفورماتورها
باشند IEC 61869-2بر اساس استاندارد ديبا انيجر يترانسفورماتورها
بايـد يحفـاظت يهـا رلـه يبرا هيثانو ينام انيقدرت، جرينام انيجر ،راه دور يريگ اندازه زاتيتجه يبرا. باشد
شود نيمأت يمكك انيترانسفورماتور جر قييا از طر مايتواند مستق
ترانسفورماتور جر يو انتخاب توان خروج يسازنده تابلو مسئول بررسترانسفورماتور جريـان را جهـت تأييـد با نقشه تك خطي كارفرما، سازنده بايد محاسبات تعيين توان خروجي
دي ـبا يري ـگ به منظور اندازه انيجر يكلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورهايا بهتر باشند 3 ديگير از راه دور با اندازه يجهت آمپرمترها ان
يتابلوها يحفاظت زاتيتجه انيجر يكلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورهاحفاظت يها جهت استفاده در رله انيجر يبايد كلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورها
كلاس دقت ترانسـفورماتورها نيمورد قبول است و همچن 10 IEC 61869-2كه در استاندارد Xكلاس ديبا) 87
متصل باشند نيطرف به زم كيدر ديبا انيجر يترانسفورماتورهامتصل باشد نيبه زم ديبا Yوصل شده باشند، نقطه اتصال
.باشد
هـاي قابـل دسترسـي كـه داراي رابـط هاي ثانويه ترانسفورماتورهاي جريان بايد به ترمينال .اتصال كوتاه هستند متصل گردد
در قسمت ثابت داخـل تـابلو ديقدرت با يدهايكل انيجر يترانسفورماتورهادر قسمت كشوي ديوتور بام يراه اندازها يبرا انيجر ي
نييتع يخطا انيتحمل جر تيقابل ديبا انيجر يترانسفورماتورها .داشته باشند
و ضريب امنيت مورد لزوم را داشته باشند يتوان نام ديبا انيجر يترانسفورماتورها
براساس الزامات استاندارد ديبا انيجر يترانسفورماتورها يرو
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ترانسفورماتورها 9-4
ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-1
قدرت، جر يدر تابلو 9-4-2باشد A 5ديبا يريگ اندازه
تواند مستق يآمپر م كي
سازنده تابلو مسئول بررس 9-4-3با نقشه تك خطي كارفرما، سازنده بايد محاسبات تعيين توان خروجي
.كارفرما ارائه نمايد
كلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-4انيجر يترانسفورماتورها
كلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-5بايد كلاس دقت ترانسفورماتورها
10Pحالت كلاس دقت
87كد مشخصه (تفاضلي
ترانسفورماتورها هيثانو 9-4-6وصل شده باشند، نقطه اتصال Yبه صورت انيجرmm حداقل بايد
باشد 25/2
هاي ثانويه ترانسفورماتورهاي جريان بايد به ترمينال ترمينال 9-4-7اتصال كوتاه هستند متصل گردد
ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-8ترانسفورماتورها. باشند
ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-9داشته باشند يكيو مكان
ترانسفورماتورها 9-4-10 .باشد 5كمتر از دينبا
يگذار علامت 9-4-11
مطـابق بـا اسـتاندارد دي ـكه ترانسفورماتور ولتاژ در نقشه تك خطي نشان داده شـده باشـد، با اي ـ/ شـده توسـط سـازنده ادوات حفاظـت و
و هياز نوع جدا شونده در طرف اول
متصل شـده نيرابط قابل برداشت به زم
و يري ـگ انـــدازه يبـرا 1و بـا كـلاس دقـت
،V 230 و از نـوع تـك فـاز يطراح ـ
توسط سازنده تـابلو انتخـاب ديها، نشان داده نشده باشند، با
مخصـوص يتـابلو كي ـتوانـد از اين سيستم تغذيه ميهـا در كننده گرم هيتغذ يتابلوها. تأمين شوند
بـه ينشـت يحفـاظت لهيوس ـ كي ـبه همراه .را داشته باشد، حفاظت شود
چـراغ نشـان . شـود هي ـها تعب كنندهكننده مربوطـه بودن گرم سيدهنده در سرو
April 2019
IPS
27
ولتاژ يترانسفورماتورها
كه ترانسفورماتور ولتاژ در نقشه تك خطي نشان داده شـده باشـد، با شـده توسـط سـازنده ادوات حفاظـت و نيـي آن بر اسـاس ولتـاژ تع هيبوده و ولتاژ ثانو
.انتخاب گردد
انيمحدود كننده جر وزهاييتوسط ف ديولتاژ با يترانسفورماتورها .حفاظت شوند هيفيوزها يا كليدهاي مينياتوري در طرف ثانو
رابط قابل برداشت به زم لهيبه وس ديفورماتور ولتاژ باترانس هيثانو يچي
و بـا كـلاس دقـت ) خشـك (از نوع عايق هوا ديولتاژ با يترانسفورماتورها .باشد 3Pحفاظت با كلاس دقت
ضد رطوبت
طراح ـ يكـاركرد دائم ـ تيجهت ظرف ديضد رطوبت، با
ها، نشان داده نشده باشند، با كننده ها تعداد و اندازه گرم .شود يم هيسلول توصكننده در هر گرم كيحالت استفاده از
اين سيستم تغذيه مي. مستقل باشندها بايد داراي تغذيه تأمين شوند مستقل يا تابلوي توزيع برق يروشناي ياز تابلو
.تابلو بايد از باس سمت مقابل تأمين شوند
به همراه ياتورينيم ديكل لهيبه وس ديبا ها در هر سلولرا داشته باشد، حفاظت شود mA 30 تيمانده كه حساس يا قطع كننده جريان باقي
كننده جهت عملكرد گرم ديسنج با رطوبت/ترموستات كيدهنده در سرو شانتابلو در نظر گرفته شود كه ن يرو ديبا
.داشته باشند يپوشش حفاظت ديها با كننده گرم
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
ترانسفورماتورها 9-5
كه ترانسفورماتور ولتاژ در نقشه تك خطي نشان داده شـده باشـد، با يوقت 1- 9-5IEC 61869-3 بوده و ولتاژ ثانو
انتخاب گردد يريگ اندازه
ترانسفورماتورها 2- 9-5فيوزها يا كليدهاي مينياتوري در طرف ثانو
يپ ميسر س كي 3- 9-5 .باشد
ترانسفورماتورها 4- 9-5حفاظت با كلاس دقت يبـــرا
ضد رطوبت يها كننده گرم 9-6
يها كننده گرم 9-6-1Hz50 انتخاب شوند.
ها تعداد و اندازه گرم اگر در نقشه 9-6-2حالت استفاده از نيدر ا. شود
ها بايد داراي تغذيه كننده گرم 9-6-3از تابلو ايها، كننده گرم
تابلو بايد از باس سمت مقابل تأمين شوندهر سمت
ها در هر سلول كننده گرم 9-6-4يا قطع كننده جريان باقي نيزم
يدر هر سلول 9-6-5با) يآب حايترج(دهنده
.است
گرم يها ناليترم 9-6-6
. شـود نيمأتوسـط سـازنده ت ـ ديو مطمئن تابلو با .ها قرار دارد، تهيه شود چيكه در اتاق سو
.شده
. مختلف
.ها از محفظه انداز بزرگ راه
.شده دهيكش رونيانداز كشويي و در حالت ب
).ي
سـه نسـخه از گـزارش . شـده باشـند
براسـاس دي ـقـدرت و تجهيـزات با IEC مربوطه كـه در آنهـا ذكـر شـده
اي مطـابق بـا مونـه هـاي ن بـا درخواسـت كارفرمـا آزمـايش
مبتنـي بـر IECمطـابق الزامـات هـا حـداقل چهـار دي ـهـا را با شينوع آزما
هـا، نظـارت داشـته دسـتگاه شيدر تمام مراحل ساخت و آزما
يفازها كه يدر حال ن،ينول با زم وكمتـر دي ـشـده نبا يري ـگ اندازه ي
:رديانجام پذ
April 2019
IPS
28
و مطمئن تابلو با حيصح اتيجهت انجام عمل ازيمورد نكه در اتاق سو يا مجموعه ايجهت هر مجموعه و ديبا ر
شده رهيذخ يقدرت توسط انرژ ديعملكرد كل ستميس ي
مختلف يها تيقدرت در موقع يدهايجهت قرار دادن كل
راههاي ماژول ايقدرت يدهايكل ييآوردن و جابجا رون
انداز كشويي و در حالت ب راههاي ماژول شيقابل انعطاف جهت آزما
يارياخت(قدرت در صورت لزوم يدهايكل شيآزما ي
.راتيجهت نصب و تعم ازيابزار مخصوص مورد ن
ها و بازرسي فني
شـده باشـند شيدر كارخانـه آزمـا دياستاندارد با نياشاره شده در ا .گردد ميتسل داريبه خر ديشده با ديتأي ي
يتابلوهـا يبـر رو يعموم يها شيو آزما ينوع يهاIEC يستانداردهاو ا IEC 61439, IEC 60947الزامات سري استانداردهاي
بـا درخواسـت كارفرمـا آزمـايش . هاي مربوطه ارائـه شـود است، باشد و گواهينامه .باشد استانداردهاي مذكور قابل انجام مي
هـا شيخود را جهت حضور در كارخانه كه ناظر آزما نوع آزما نيفروشنده زمان ا. كند يم نييتوافق شده خواهد بود، تع
.برساند داريبه اطلاع خر شيهفته قبل از شروع آزما
در تمام مراحل ساخت و آزما يحق دارد جهت بازرس
و هر فاز نيب ديبا يقيمقاومت عا شيقدرت، آزما يقبل از حمل تابلويقيمقدار مقاومت عا. وصل شده باشند، انجام شود ني
.باشد
انجام پذ ديبا ليحداقل موارد ذ ديبر تأي يمبن يو موضع يظاهر
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
يلوازم جانب 9-7
مورد ن يلوازم جانب 9-7-1ريز يحداقل لوازم جانب
يشارژ دست لهيوس -الف
جهت قرار دادن كل يدست لهيوس -ب
رونيارابه مخصوص ب -پ
يارتباط هاي كابل -ت
يبرا شيآزما يتابلو -ث
ابزار مخصوص مورد ن -ج
ها و بازرسي فني آزمايش 10
اشاره شده در اتجهيزات 1- 10يها يو گواه ها شيآزما
ها شيتمامي آزما 2- 10الزامات سري استانداردهاي
است، باشد و گواهينامهاستانداردهاي مذكور قابل انجام مي
ندهينما داريخر 3- 10QCP وITP توافق شده خواهد بود، تع
هفته قبل از شروع آزما
دارينماينده خر 4- 10 .باشد
قبل از حمل تابلو 5- 10يو نول به زم مانده يباقباشد )هممگا ا( MΩ 5از
ظاهر يبازرس نيهمچن
؛1قفل داخلي
متفـاوت يك ـيالكتر نظـر از يول ـ يكسـان
كامـل از قطعـات و يسـر كي ديباشد، با يتـابلو يبا مشخصات قطعـات اصـل
.شدرا داشته با
.دو ساله را ارسال كند
1- Interlock System
April 2019
IPS
29
بدنه؛
قطعات؛ نيب محفظه داخل
ها؛ ها و پوشش اعتماد و عملكرد موثر جداكننده
قفل داخلي ستميس و ها قفل عملكرد زميمكان بودن موثر
ها؛
؛يقيعا مجاز يها فاصله
قطعات؛
؛يداخل يبند كابل و
؛يكمك و ياصل يمدارها
ها؛ ناليترم شيآرا و نيزم اتصال ها،
آن؛ عملكرد اساس بر دستگاه حي
دستگاه؛ پلاك يرو بر اطلاعات
تابلو؛ سرتاسر در نيزم اتصال ستميس
مشابه؛ يكيالكتر قطعات
يكسـان يكيمكان نظر از كه كشويي يها دستگاه يني
باشد، با ياستاندارد م نيكه بر اساس ا زاتيتجه هيكلبا مشخصات قطعـات اصـل ديبا يدكيلوازم . قدرت داده شود يهر تابلو يانداز
را داشته با ينيگزيجا تيقابل يرييتغ چگونهيقدرت متناسب بوده و بدون ه
دو ساله را ارسال كند اتيشده جهت عمل هيتوص يدكيفهرست قطعات
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
بدنه؛ حفاظت درجه -الف
داخل در حفاظت درجه -ب
اعتماد و عملكرد موثر جداكننده تيقابل -پ
موثر و اعتماد تيقابل -ت
ها؛ نهيش يبند قيعا -ث
فاصله و خزش فاصله -ج
قطعات؛ حيصح نصب -چ
يكش ميس ستميس -ح
مدارها حيصح يكش ميس -خ
ها، بست بودن مناسب -د
يصح يگذار برچسب -ذ
اطلاعات بودن كامل -ر
س بودن دسترس در -ز
قطعات ينيگزيجا تيقابل -ژ
يگزيجا امكان عدم -س .هستند
دكييلوازم 11
كل نيمأهمراه با ت 11-1انداز جهت راه يدكيلوازم
قدرت متناسب بوده و بدون ه
فهرست قطعات ديفروشنده با 11-2
هـا نقشـه / يمـدارك عمـوم . ارسال كندهاي پيشنهادي، بررسي و تجديـد نظـر شـده
و يدر رابطـه بـا قطعـات اصـل يقدرت نمونه و اطلاعات فن ـ .رهيو غ
:باشد ريشامل موارد ز
.شده بايد به صورت نسخه اصلي و چاپي ارائه شوند
. انداز راه قدرت و
يها و قسمت نيزم يرو يتابلوهــا، تابلوها
.قدرت باشد
.هاي منطقي، حسب مورد
قابـل يشـنهاد يقطعـات پ هيكل ي
1- Interlock System
April 2019
IPS
30
ارسال كند يرا جهت بررس شنهادياطلاعات لازم همراه با پهاي پيشنهادي، بررسي و تجديـد نظـر شـده آنها براي نشان دادن دستگاه كه نيمگر ا
:باشد ريموارد ز يحداقل دارا ديبا ديخر شنهاديبا پ
.شده ليتكم يداده برگ درخواست
.استاندارد نيها و انحرافات از ا
قدرت نمونه و اطلاعات فن ـ يشرح كامل تابلو يكاتالوگ و بروشور، داراو غ يريگ اندازه يها ها و دستگاه قدرت، كنتاكتورها، رله
.آمده است شنهاديكه در پ ي
يمقدمات
.دستگاه جهت حمل و نقل ي
شامل موارد ز ديهمراه با دستگاه داده شود حداقل با
شده بايد به صورت نسخه اصلي و چاپي ارائه شوندهاي توليد ها و شماتيك
.تكميل و به روز آمد شده يداده برگ درخواست
.ينهائ ي
قدرت و يدهاياز كل كيمدار كنترل هر كيو شمات ي
تابلوهــا، تابلوها شينما ،يكه نشان دهنده ابعاد اصل يعموم
قدرت باشد يها و اتصال كابل يخروج ناليكه نشان دهنده ترم
هاي منطقي، حسب مورد و كليه دياگرام 1قفل داخلي ستمياطلاعات مربوط به توالي س
يكه نشان دهنده اطلاعات ثبت شده برا يو كمك يفهرست قطعات اصل
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
مدارك 12
اطلاعات لازم همراه با پ ديفروشنده با 1- 12مگر ا. باشد يمورد قبول نم
با پ يمدارك ارسال. باشد
داده برگ درخواست -الف
ها و انحرافات از ا رتيخلاصه مغا -ب
كاتالوگ و بروشور، دارا -پقدرت، كنتاكتورها، رله دياز جمله كل يكمك
يفهرست لوازم جانب -ت
مقدمات يابعاد يها نقشه -ث
يبيابعاد و وزن تقر -ج
ديكه با يمدارك 2- 12
ها و شماتيك نقشه -الف
داده برگ درخواست -ب
يتك خط يها نقشه -پ
يكش ميس يها نقشه -ت
عموم شيآرا يها نقشه -ث .حمل و نقل باشد
كه نشان دهنده ترم ييها نقشه -ج
اطلاعات مربوط به توالي س -چ
فهرست قطعات اصل -ح .باشد ينيگزيجا
IEC 61439-1 استاندارد D وست
.لازم است راتيو تعم يبردار
و آمـاده نمـودن جهـت يبند بسته
و ييباشد كـه در موقـع حمـل و نقـل، جابجـا
شـامل اطلاعـات لازم همـراه بـا شـماره .شده است، نصب گردد
از گمرك، همـراه دسـتگاه داده ص
را كه يزاتيتجه يخراب دينموده و با .دينما نيگزيشود با قطعات مناسب جا
:دينما نيگزيكارائي نداشته باشد، جا
April 2019
IPS
31
. يشنهاديدوساله پ ي
.عملكرد يو منحن يينها يعموم ي
.ها شيآزما جيو نتا يزيآم رنگ
وستيو پ IEC 61439-2مربوطه مطابق با استاندارد يها
.راتينگهداري و تعم ،ينصب، بهره بردار
.اشكال و رفع ي
. ماتيو محدوده تنظ ها يمنحن ،يحفاظت
انيقطع كننده جر ي
و وزن هر كدام از اجزاء قابل حمل وزن كل مجموعه دستگاه
بردار كه جهت نصب، بهره يهر ابزار مخصوص اي/و يفهرست لوازم جانب
بسته تيمسئول ياستاندارد، به تنهاي نيفروشنده دستگاه اشاره شده در ا .حمل و نقل دستگاه را خواهد داشت
باشد كـه در موقـع حمـل و نقـل، جابجـا يطور ديجهت حمل و نقل با يساز و آماده .شود يريجلوگ يكيقراردادن از خسارت مكان
شـامل اطلاعـات لازم همـراه بـا شـماره يبرچسب دائم ديشده با يبند بسته يها از قسمتشده است، نصب گردد ذكرقدرت كه در داده برگ پيوست الف
صيجهت ترخ ديدستگاه با قيمدارك حمل و نقل با شرح كامل و دق
نموده و با يگارانتها را دستگاه دياستاندارد با نيفروشنده دستگاه بر اساس اشود با قطعات مناسب جا جاديا ياشكالات طراح اي/و
كارائي نداشته باشد، جا ريز طيرا كه در شرا وبيدستگاه مع ريدر موارد ز
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
يدكيقطعات ستيل -خ
يها شيگزارش آزما -د
رنگ يمشخصات فن -ذ
ها شيآزما يها يگواه -ر
نصب، بهره بردار يها دستورالعمل -ز
يابي بيع يها كتابچه -ژ
حفاظت يها نوع رله -س
يوزهايمشخصات ف -ش
وزن كل مجموعه دستگاه -ص
فهرست لوازم جانب -ض
حمل و نقل 13
فروشنده دستگاه اشاره شده در ا 1- 13حمل و نقل دستگاه را خواهد داشت
و آماده يبند بسته 2- 13قراردادن از خسارت مكان هم يرو
از قسمت كيبه هر 3- 13قدرت كه در داده برگ پيوست الف يتابلو ييشناسا
مدارك حمل و نقل با شرح كامل و دق 4- 13 .شود
گارانتي 14
فروشنده دستگاه بر اساس ا 1- 14و فيدر اثر ساخت ضع
در موارد ز ديفروشنده با 2- 14
. IECهاي هيبراساس توص
ـ مـاه از زمـان 18از شيماهه، مشروط بر آنكـه ب
April 2019
IPS
32
براساس توص يراه انداز يها شيكار نكردن دستگاه در موقع شروع و آزما
ماهه، مشروط بر آنكـه ب ـ 12دوره كياستفاده عادي در طيدستگاه در شرا .تحويل به كارفرما نگذشته باشد
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
كار نكردن دستگاه در موقع شروع و آزما -
دستگاه در شرا يخراب -تحويل به كارفرما نگذشته باشد
فيقدرت و فرمان ولتاژ ضع
.ارسال خواهد نمود داريخود براي خر
فيضع
No. Subject
1 Name of project or plant
2 Switchgear identification No
3 Single line diagram number
4 Site elevation above sea level (m)
5 Maximum indoor temperature
6 Minimum indoor temperature
7 24 hr. average indoor temperature
8 Maximum outdoor ambient temperature
9 Minimum outdoor ambient temperature
10 Relative humidity
11 Pollution Degree
12 Installation (indoor/ outdoor)
13 Area classification zones,( in case of outdoor
installation)
14 Nominal system voltage, 3phase and neutral
15 System voltage variation
16 Nominal frequency and frequency variation
17 Neutral earthing system (solidly earthed)
18 Incomers to the switchgear by duct or cable
19 Enclosure degree of protection (IP code)
20 External Mechanical Impact (IK code)
21 Ics, Icu, Icw, Icm
22 Form of internal separation of the enclosure
23 Degree of protection of separation partitions or barriers
(IP code)
24 Plate thickness of the enclosure
25 Color of the enclosure
26 Power busbars cross section
27 Busbars rated current
April 2019
IPS
33
پيوست الف
)الزامي(
قدرت و فرمان ولتاژ ضع يداده برگ تابلو
خود براي خر يفن شنهاديكرده و همراه پ ليداده برگ را تكم
ضع ولتاژ فرمان و قدرت يتابلو برگ داده -1جدول
*
*
*
Site elevation above sea level (m) * متر( ايدر سطح(
Maximum indoor temperature * داخلي
Minimum indoor temperature * داخلي
24 hr. average indoor temperature * ساعته داخلي
Maximum outdoor ambient temperature * روني
Minimum outdoor ambient temperature * روني
*
*
Installation (indoor/ outdoor) *
Area classification zones,( in case of outdoor *
صورتدر ( خطرناك
Nominal system voltage, 3phase and neutral *
*
Nominal frequency and frequency variation *
Neutral earthing system (solidly earthed) * شده نيزم ا(
Incomers to the switchgear by duct or cable * كابل اي كانال
Enclosure degree of protection (IP code) *
External Mechanical Impact (IK code) * كدIK(
)IEC 60947-1مطابق تعاريف
Form of internal separation of the enclosure تابلو
protection of separation partitions or barriers )كد IP( موانع اي
Plate thickness of the enclosure
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
داده برگ را تكم نيا فروشنده
رديف موضوع
1 واحد اي پروژه نام 2 قدرت يتابلو يشناساي شماره 3 يخط تك نقشه شمارهسطح از دستگاه گرفتن قرار محل ارتفاع 4
داخلي محيط حرارت درجه حداكثر 5 داخلي محيط حرارت درجه حداقل 6 ساعته داخلي 24دماي متوسط 7 رونييب طيمح حرارت درجه حداكثر 8 رونييب طيمح حرارت درجه حداقل 9 10 ينسب رطوبت 11 يآلودگ درجه 12 )رونييب /داخلي ( نصب محلخطرناك منطقه شده يبند درجه ينواح
)ساختمان رونيب محوطه در نصب13
14 نول و فاز سه ستم،يس ينام ولتاژ 15 ولتاژ راتييتغ ستميس
16 فركانس راتييتغ و ينام فركانساميمستق( نول نيزم اتصال ستميس 17
18 قيطر از قدرت يتابلو يها يورود 19 )كد IP( محفظه حفاظت درجهكد (ضربه مكانيكي خارجي تحمل 20
Ics, Icu, Icw, Icm) مطابق تعاريف 21
تابلو محفظه داخل يجداساز شكل 22
23 يداخل يها جداساز حفاظت درجه
24 محفظه ورقه ضخامت 25 محفظه رنگ
26 مقطع سطح برق يها نهيش 27 ها نهيش ينام انيجر
)ادامه( فيضع
No. Subject
28 Busbars short circuit withstand current rms
symmetrical
29 Busbars short circuit withstand time
30 Busbars insulation
31 Busbars colors, phases and neutral
32 Busbars joints silver plated or not
33 Total length of the switchgear
34 Height of the switchgear
35 Depth of the switchgear
36 Shipping weight of the switchgear/individual shipping
sections
37 Numbers of incomer circuit breaker/s
38 Numbers of bus tie circuit breaker/s
39 Tie breaker/s mode of operation OPEN/CLOSE
40 Numbers of poles and current rating of incomer and tie
breakers
41 Circuit breakers interrupting medium (if different than
air)
42 Circuit breakers closing mechanism (direct
manual/motor driven)
43 Circuit breakers breaking capacity rms symmetrical at
1sec and 3sec.
44 Circuit breakers breaking capacity (kA) rms
asymmetrical
45 Circuit breakers making capacity (kA) asymmetrical
46 Opening time of circuit breakers
47 Closing time of circuit breakers
48 The voltage of the spring charging motor of circuit
breakers
49 Circuit breakers closing and tripping voltage
50 Control of circuit breakers (local/remote)
51 Circuit breakers protective relays
52 Circuit breakers indicating instruments
53 Watt-hour meter for incomers (supplied or not)
April 2019
IPS
34
ضع ولتاژ فرمان و قدرت يتابلو برگ داده - 1جدول
Busbars short circuit withstand current rms ها نهياتصال كوتاه ش
ها نهي
آن بدون *
Shipping weight of the switchgear/individual shipping
وزن/ نقل
Numbers of incomer circuit breaker/s
Numbers of bus tie circuit breaker/s نه
Tie breaker/s mode of operation OPEN/CLOSE * بسته/باز ها، نه
Numbers of poles and current rating of incomer and tie
و يورود ي
Circuit breakers interrupting medium (if different than )است هوا از ري
Circuit breakers closing mechanism (direct )يموتور/ يدست
Circuit breakers breaking capacity rms symmetrical at
هيثان كي يبرا قدرت
Circuit breakers breaking capacity (kA) rms )آمپر لويك( قدرت
Circuit breakers making capacity (kA) asymmetrical آمپر لويك( قدرت(
The voltage of the spring charging motor of circuit
Circuit breakers closing and tripping voltage
Control of circuit breakers (local/remote) از راه دور/ ي(
Attach list or
diagram/s نقشه اي فهرست
شود وستيپ
Circuit breakers indicating instruments
Attach list or
diagram/s نقشه اي فهرست
شود وستيپ
hour meter for incomers (supplied or not) *
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
رديف موضوع
اتصال كوتاه ش انيجر (rms)تحمل مقدار موثر 28
يش كوتاه اتصال انيجر تحمل زمان 29 30 ها نهيش قيعا
31 نول و فازها ها، نهيش رنگبدون اي اندود نقره ها نهيش اتصال محل 32 33 قدرت تابلو كل طول
34 قدرت تابلو ارتفاع 35 تابلو قدرت عمقنقل و حمل يبرا قدرت تابلو كل وزن
قدرت تابلو يمجزا يها قسمت36
37 يورود قدرت يها ديكل تعدادنهيش ارتباط قدرت يها ديكل تعداد 38 نهيش ارتباط قدرت يدهايكل تيوضع 39
يدهايكل ينام انيجر و ها پل تعداد ها نهيش ارتباطي
40
يغاگر ( قدرت يدهايكل قطع طيمح 41
دست( قدرت يدهايكل وصل زميمكان 42
قدرت ديكل متقارن موثر قطع قدرت هيثان سه و
43
قدرت ديكل نامتقارن موثر قطع قدرت 44
قدرت يدهايكل نامتقارن وصل تيظرف 45 46 قدرت ديكل شدن قطع زمان 47 قدرت ديكل شدن وصل زمان
48 قدرت ديولتاژ شارژ فنر كل
49 قدرت ديكل Tripوصل و ولتاژ
يمحل( قدرت يدهايكل كنترل نحوه 50
51 قدرت يدهايكل يحفاظت يها رله
52 قدرت يدهايكل يها دهنده نشان
53 )ريخ/ بله ( ها يورود كنتور
)ادامه( فيضع
No. Subject
54 Additional auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers
(paragraph 8.1.20)
55 Numbers and sizes of outgoing feeders
56 Type of outgoing feeders (ACB/MCCB/switch
fuse)
57 Numbers and motor rating
58 Motor starters isolating means (fused
isolator/MCCB)
59 Motor starters control voltage
60 Motor starters protection relays
61 Motor starters indicating instruments
62 Motor control stations (to be included or not)
63 CT type and ratio for protection and indication
metering
64 CT type and ratio for remote ammeter (on
control station)
65 Numbers and wattage of anti-condensation
heaters (if any)
66 4-20 mA output transducers
67 Manufacturer of circuit breakers
68 Manufacturer of contactors
69 Manufacturer of switch fuses and MCCB’s
70 Manufacturer of protective relays
71 Manufacturer of indicating instruments
72 Type test certificates for complete switchgear
and components.
73 Accessories
74 Deviation from this specification if any
* Items marked with asterisk will be specified by purchaser.
April 2019
IPS
35
ضع ولتاژ فرمان و قدرت يتابلو برگ داده - 1جدول
Additional auxiliary contacts for circuit breakers
قدرت يدهاي
Numbers and sizes of outgoing feeders
Attach list or
diagram/s
.شود وستيپ نقشه اي فهرست
Type of outgoing feeders (ACB/MCCB/switch
MCCB /ديكل
Attach list or
diagram/s
.شود وستيپ نقشه اي فهرست
/ وزيف د
Attach list or
diagram/s شود وستيپ نقشه اي فهرست
موتور
Motor starters indicating instruments Attach list or
diagram/s شود وستيپ نقشه اي فهرست
موتور
Motor control stations (to be included or not) * ريخ (
CT type and ratio for protection and indication
يبرا انيجر
CT type and ratio for remote ammeter (on
يبرا انيجر )يمحل كنترل
condensation
در ( رطوبت ضد
20 - mA 4
Manufacturer of circuit breakers
Manufacturer of switch fuses and MCCB’s
Manufacturer of indicating instruments ها دهنده نشان
Type test certificates for complete switchgear To be attached
شود وستيپ آن اجزاء و قدرت
Attach list
شود وستيپ فهرست
Deviation from this specification if any Attach list
شود وستيپ فهرست وجود
Items marked with asterisk will be specified by purchaser.
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
رديف موضوع
يكل يبرا ياضاف يكمك يها كنتاكت )20- 1-8بند (
54
55 يخروج يدرهايف اندازه و تعداد
ACB /MCCB( يخروج يدرهايف نوع
)وزيف56
موتور مشخصات و تعداد57
ديكل(موتور ياندازها كننده راه قطعMCCB (
58
59 موتور ياندازها راه كنترل ولتاژ
موتور ياندازها راه يحفاظت يها رله 60
موتور ياندازها راه يدهنده ها نشان 61
خ/ بله (كنترل موتور يمحل ستگاهيا 62 جر ترانسفورماتور ليتبد نسبت و نوع
يريگ اندازه و حفاظت63
جر ترانسفورماتور ليتبد نسبت و نوع ستگاهيادر ( دور راه از يآمپرمترها
64
كن گرم يمصرف وات مقدار و تعداد )وجود صورت
65
mA 66 يخروج) مبدل( وسريترانسد 67 قدرت يدهايكل سازنده 68 كنتاكتورها سازنده
MCCB 69 ديو كل وزيف ديسازنده كل
70 يحفاظت يها رله سازندهنشان و ريگ اندازه يها دستگاه سازنده 71
قدرت تابلو ينوع شيآزما نامه يگواه 72
73 يجانب لوازم
وجود صورت در استاندارد نيا از انحراف 74
.كندياعلام م دارياقلام را خر نيا *
فشار ضعيف محيط بيروني
كه اين استاندارد جهت ساخت وقتي .موارد زير بايد در نظر گرفته شوند
از فيضع فشار قدرت يتابلو. است .باشد مناسب
و IEC 60079-10نوع بيروني بايد در محيط ايمـن مطـابق بـا الزامـات اسـتانداردهاي
را پوشـش ) 2و منطقـه 1منطقه(خطرناك
هاي ديـگ بخـار، به عبارت ديگر در آهنگري، اتاق IEC 61439كه در الزامات سري اسـتانداردهاي
استفاده شوند، بايد حسـب ) براي نصب تابلوهاي قدرت و فرمان فشار ضعيف در محيط بيرون ذكر شده است. مورد مطابق استاندارد محصولات مربوطه يا مطابق توافق ميان سازنده و كارفرمـا طراحـي و اسـتفاده شـوند
.توانند جايگزين اين توافق باشند
هاي اضافه بـار محيطي براي انواع خاصي از تجهيزات، به عنوان مثال كليدهاي قطع قدرت يا رله
بـر IP 55Wدرجـه حفاظـت يبايـد دارا بدون امكان تردد با درجه حفاظـت
.قفل شدن مجهز باشد تيهر قسمت از بدنه بايد به درب لولا دار از جلو با قابل
ني ـا 6-9 بنـد براسـاس ضدرطوبت
April 2019
IPS
36
پيوست ب
)الزامي(
فشار ضعيف محيط بيرونيو فرمان الزامات تكميلي براي تابلوي قدرت
وقتي . نمايد اي داخلي را معين ميه شرايط نصب تابلو در محيطموارد زير بايد در نظر گرفته شوند ،در بيرون ساختمان مورد استفاده قرار گيرد
شده داده نشان برگ داده در الف پيوست در رونيب مناسب شده اعلام طيشرا در اتيعمل جهت بايد ساختمان،
نوع بيروني بايد در محيط ايمـن مطـابق بـا الزامـات اسـتانداردهاي .نصب شوند
خطرناك يها مناسب در محوطه فيفشار ضع ياستاندارد نصب تابلو
به عبارت ديگر در آهنگري، اتاق+ (C 40°تجهيزاتي كه قرار است در دماي محيط بالاي كه در الزامات سري اسـتانداردهاي -C 25°به عنوان مثال ( -C 5°يا كمتر از
براي نصب تابلوهاي قدرت و فرمان فشار ضعيف در محيط بيرون ذكر شده استمورد مطابق استاندارد محصولات مربوطه يا مطابق توافق ميان سازنده و كارفرمـا طراحـي و اسـتفاده شـوند
توانند جايگزين اين توافق باشند شوند، مي عاتي كه در كاتالوگ سازنده ارائه مي
محيطي براي انواع خاصي از تجهيزات، به عنوان مثال كليدهاي قطع قدرت يا رله . اند اندازها، در استانداردهاي محصولات مربوطه مشخص شده
ي
بايـد دارا رونييدر محيط ب نصب نوع از فيضع فشار قدرتIEC 60529 بدون امكان تردد با درجه حفاظـت نتيكاب كيقدرت در يتابلو نكهيا ايباشد
هر قسمت از بدنه بايد به درب لولا دار از جلو با قابل .نصب شده باشد
ضدرطوبت كننده گرم شامل بايد رونييب محيط در نصب نوع از
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
الزامات تكميلي براي تابلوي قدرت
شرايط نصب تابلو در محيط استاندارداين در بيرون ساختمان مورد استفاده قرار گيرد تجهيزات
ياتيعمل طيشرا 1-ب
طيمح حرارت درجه -ساختمان، رونيب در نصب نوع
نوع بيروني بايد در محيط ايمـن مطـابق بـا الزامـات اسـتانداردهاي فيفشار ضع يتابلو -API RP 505 نصب شوند
استاندارد نصب تابلو نيا - .دهد ينم
تجهيزاتي كه قرار است در دماي محيط بالاي -يا كمتر از ) مناطق استوايي
براي نصب تابلوهاي قدرت و فرمان فشار ضعيف در محيط بيرون ذكر شده استمورد مطابق استاندارد محصولات مربوطه يا مطابق توافق ميان سازنده و كارفرمـا طراحـي و اسـتفاده شـوند
عاتي كه در كاتالوگ سازنده ارائه مياطلا
محيطي براي انواع خاصي از تجهيزات، به عنوان مثال كليدهاي قطع قدرت يا رله) هاي(دما -اندازها، در استانداردهاي محصولات مربوطه مشخص شده راه
يالزامات عموم 2-ب
محفظه 1- 2-ب
قدرت يتابلو محفظه- IEC 60529اساس استاندارد
IP 55W نصب شده باشد
از محفظه قسمت هر - .باشد استاندارد
روشـن / خـاموش ديكل با زيپر و لامپ .شود هيتعب يكيالكتر يابزارها
.باشد آفتاب و باران مناسب
.باشد استاندارد نيا 2-7 بند
يشده فنر رهيذخ يبايد از نوع انرژ 1قطع و وصل جهت يعملكرد دست
1- Tripping
April 2019
IPS
37
لامپ كي بايد رونييب محيط در نصب نوع از محفظه ابزارها جهت نيزم اتصال حفاظت با V 230 زيپر كي و
مناسب بان هيسا يدارا همواره بايد رونييب محيط در نصب
بند اساس بر و اندود نقره بايد رونييب محيط در نصب قدرت
بايد از نوع انرژ روني،يقدرت نصب شده در محيط ب يدر تابلو يقدرت از نوع هوائعملكرد دست زميمكان ديبا نيهمچن. مجهز باشد يعملكرد دست
.شود تعبيه
IPS-M-EL-143(3)
قسمت هر داخل در - يداخل ييروشنا جهت
نصب نوع از قدرت يتابلو -
ها نهيش 2- 2-ب
قدرت يتابلو يها نهيش
ياصل قطعات 3-ب
قدرت ديكل 1- 3-ب
قدرت از نوع هوائ ديكل زميبوده و بايد به مكان
تعبيهقدرت دينوع كل نيا
top related